User manual | 2012 Dodge Journey Owner`s Guide

2012 Journey
2012
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
12JC49-126-AA
910351 Journey OM cover.indd 1
First Edition
Journey
Printed in U.S.A.
4/12/11 11:42 AM
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional
on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description
of features and equipment that are no longer available or
were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any
features and equipment described in this manual that are
not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously
manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2011 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Identification Number
.............. 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE:
After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears stamped on the right front door sill
under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
Stamped VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 17
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . 14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
䡵 Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . 22
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . 23
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 23
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 䡵 Liftgate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . 25 䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . 52
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . 53
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode
(ALR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
䡵 Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints
(AHR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 60
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air
Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . 63
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 67
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 89
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
feature, refer to “Starting Procedure” in “Starting And the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
Operating” for further information.
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
push to operate the ignition switch.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking the glove box. You
can keep the emergency key with you when valet parking.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Ignition Or Accessory On Message
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect Touch™ system, the power
window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Touch™
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
(Continued) or unlocked.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The system uses a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) and a
RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 secCAUTION!
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Always
remove
the
keys
from the vehicle and lock all
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
doors
when
leaving
the
vehicle
unattended.
possible by an authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
an authorized dealer.
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
and liftgate for unauthorized entry and the Keyless
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior
performed at an authorized dealer.
switches for door locks are disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide
the following audible and visible signals: the horn will
pulse, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in • For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the
the instrument cluster will flash.
key is physically removed from the ignition.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to 2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn vehicle:
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
after 15 additional minutes, and then the Vehicle Security
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
Alarm will rearm itself.
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
To Arm The System
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go⬙ in ⬙Things To
1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further informa⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for tion).
further information).
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, make (RKE) transmitter.
sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn
the key to the ON position.
• Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a
Vehicle Security Alarm.
valid Key Fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passive entry
door handle (if equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N- • When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
Go⬙ in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙
for further information).
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
position.
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times when you
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for
tampering.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
The interior lights will fade to off after approximately
30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the
ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF
position.
NOTE:
• The front courtesy overhead console and door courSecurity System Manual Override
tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
(extreme bottom position).
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door or liftgate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
2
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Turn Headlights On With Remote Key Unlock
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors 1st
equipped through Uconnect Touch™. To change the
Press
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
information.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
information.
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
Flash Lights With Remote Key
signal.
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit- If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change “Keyless Enter-N-Go” under “Things To Know Before
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE:
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors • The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding
and horn will remain on.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
Using The Panic Alarm
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
by the system.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
Programming Additional Transmitters
headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
performed at an authorized dealer.
turn on.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
battery.
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways with
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
hand.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves of
Separating RKE Transmitter Case
the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
seal during removal.
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign on
the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching the new
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause battery If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with rubbing distance, check for these two conditions:
alcohol.
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
halves together.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Key Fob with Remote
following conditions:
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintaining security. The system has
• This device must accept any interference received,
a
range
of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
•
The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly aptransmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob
may reduce this range.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
•
•
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
RKE PANIC button not pressed.
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
System not disabled from previous remote start event vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
Vehicle theft alarm not active
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
Ignition in OFF position
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
•
WARNING!
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled • For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
to the ON/RUN position.
in the Remote Start mode.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button • The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
Vehicle
cycle.
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system These features will stay on through the duration of
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START remote start or until the ignition switch is turned to the
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote ON/RUN position.
Start request.
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle deactivated through the Uconnect Touch™ system. For
Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the more information on Remote Start Comfort System opUNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the eration refer to “Uconnect Touch™ system/Uconnect
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if Touch™ Settings — Customer Programmable Features”
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle, in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
press and release the START/STOP button.
DOOR LOCKS
NOTE: The message “Push Start Button” will display in
Manual Door Locks
the EVIC until you push the START button.
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
When remote start is activated, the driver heated seat inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
features will automatically turn on in cold weather. In doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will auto- upward.
matically turn on when the remote start is activated.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
WARNING!
Manual Door Lock Knob
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
NOTE: The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
severe personal injuries or death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, and do not leave the ignition in the in the
ACC or RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
If you press the power door lock switch while the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any front door is
open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents you
from accidentally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle.
Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or closing the
door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open, and
the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Power Door Lock Switch Location
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer. Please see your authorized dealer for
service.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Touch™
power door locks if:
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en- further information.
abled.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed in accordance with local laws.
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
4. The driver door is opened.
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Engage The Child-Protection Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the
child lock control and rotate it to the LOCK position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
NOTE: When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
To Disengage The Child-Protection Door Lock
System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key (or alike) into the
child lock control and rotate it to the UNLOCK position.
NOTE:
• After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the lock knob up to the UNLOCK position, roll down
the window, and open the door with the outside door
handle.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
NOTE: After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
“Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your
Lock system, always test the door from the inside to
Instrument Panel” for further information.
make certain it is in the desired position.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower revehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
sponse time.
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This feature allows you to
lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to • If the vehicle is unlocked by the RKE transmitter or
Passive Entry and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds,
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the
theft alarm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors and the
liftgate automatically.
NOTE: All doors and the liftgate will unlock when the
front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Grabbing The Driver’s Door Handle
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the button underneath the left
side of the accent bar, which is located on the liftgate
below the glass, to lock or unlock the vehicle.
Liftgate Unlock/Lock Button
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE:
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on • After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the outside of the handles.
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect Touch™
System, the key protection described in ⬙Preventing
Inadvertent Locking of Passive Entry RKE Transmitter
in Vehicle⬙ remains active/functional.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door vehicle’s interior door panel.
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and the liftgate.
Outside Door Handle Lock Button
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
Power Windows
The window controls will operate when the ignition is in
The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel
the ON/RUN or ACC position.
control all of the door windows.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect
Touch™, the power window switches will remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect
Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
WINDOWS
WARNING!
Power Window Switches
Never leave children in a vehicle with the Key Fob.
Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the
power window switches. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
To close the window part way, pull the window switch
Auto-Down Feature
The driver’s power window switch has an Auto-down up to the first detent and release it when you want the
feature. Press the window switch past the first detent, window to stop.
release, and the window will go down automatically.
NOTE:
To open the window part way, press the window switch • If the window runs into any obstacle during Autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then go back
to the first detent and release it when you want the
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
window to stop.
switch again to close the window.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly. • Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoAuto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection — If
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
Equipped
first detent and hold to close window manually.
On some models, the driver’s and front passenger’s
power window switch has an Auto-up feature. Pull the
window switch up to the second detent, release, and the
window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. To avoid personal injury, be sure to
clear your arms, hands, fingers, and objects from the
window path before closing the window. Such entrapment may result in serious injury.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window control on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
Reset
press and release the window lockout button (setting it in
It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the
the down position). To enable the window controls, press
Auto-up/Auto-down feature. To do so, perform the
and release the window lockout button again (setting it in
following steps:
the up position).
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Window Lockout Switch
LIFTGATE
The liftgate can be unlocked or locked pressing the
UNLOCK or LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, the Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive Entry) or by activating the power door lock switch located
on either front door trim panel.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of For further information on Keyless Enter-N-Go (Passive
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the Entry), refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The liftgate cannot be unlocked or locked with NOTE: Because the gas pressure drops with temperathe manual door lock plungers on the door trim panels or ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
the door lock cylinder on the driver’s door.
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
To open the unlocked liftgate, squeeze the handle and
pull the liftgate toward you. Gas props will raise and
support the liftgate in the open position.
Liftgate Release
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. These fumes
could injure you and your passengers. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
blower switch on the climate control is set at high
speed. Do not use the recirculation mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
Some of the most important safety features in your
wheel
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for all seating
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
positions
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenenergy during an impact event
ger
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s and second
row center) include Automatic Locking Retractors
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
(ALRs) or a cinching latch plate, or both, which lock
the seat belt webbing into position by extending the
restraint) — if equipped
belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
item in a seat — if equipped
(SABIC) that span the front, second, and third row
Please pay close attention to the information in this
seating for the driver and passengers seated next to a
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
window
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
possible.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
collision.
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltHere are some simple steps you can take to minimize the positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
buckled up in a rear seat.
their arm.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
WARNING!
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In an accident, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause an accident that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in an accident.
Some of the worst injuries happen when people are
thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
combination lap/shoulder belts.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in an accident, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In an accident, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of an accident best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in an accident much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is located on the pillar near the
back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to make the belt go around your lap.
Pulling Out Lap/Shoulder Belt
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle
(Continued)
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in an accident, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during an accident. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in an
accident.
Removing Slack From Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in an accident. The belt forces
won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but
across your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt will not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in
your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in an accident and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after an accident if they have
been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck. Push and fully
depress the button above the webbing to release the
anchorage, then move it up or down to the position that
fits you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing. • N/A — Not Applicable
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
latch plate.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
folded webbing.
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
equipped an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
cinching latch plate which are used to secure a child
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
restraint system. For additional information, refer to
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort“Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt”
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
under the “Child Restraints” section. The chart below
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Driver
Center
Passenger
Equipped
First Row
N/A
N/A
ALR
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically preSecond Row
ALR
Cinch
ALR
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
Third Row
ALR
N/A
ALR
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions (except the driver’s and second row center) with a combination lap/
shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime
a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that
has a belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and
under should always be properly restrained in the rear
seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
Energy Management Feature
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
accident. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled occupant early in an accident. Pretensioners work for all
manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt size occupants, including those in child restraints.
force acting on the occupant’s chest.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
WARNING!
worn snugly and positioned properly.
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Reif the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretentractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt funcsioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
tion is not working properly when checked aca deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) — If
Equipped
could increase the risk of injury in accidents.
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are identified by any markings, only through visual inspecequipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of an in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
accident. These devices may improve the performance of trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severity and type of the impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear
Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
CAUTION!
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of an
accident.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in an accident,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and 2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active a comfortable position.
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
AHR In Reset Position
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
NOTE:
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Active Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occuchecked by a qualified specialist at an authorized pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
dealer.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
(8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will provide both audio and visual We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
notification.
the best way to keep the baby safe.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are the force if there is an accident.
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
Seat Belt Extender
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac- when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
tivating BeltAlert威.
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
long enough. When it is not required, remove the exwhile the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
tender and store it.
belt alert) seat belt remains unfastened.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in an accident. Only use when
the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low
and snug and in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the extender when not needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the 1 — Driver And Passenger
2 — Knee Bolster
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The Advanced Front Air Bags
3 — Supplemental Driver Side
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers. Knee Air Bag
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
panel below the steering column.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seatdesign. This allows the air bag to have different rates of Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB). The SABs are marked with
an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
seats.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the NOTE:
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon • Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front • After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
Air Bag System Components
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
Advanced Front Air Bags.
system components:
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC • Air Bag Warning Light
air bags are located above the side windows and their
• Steering Wheel and Column
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
• Instrument Panel
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
• Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
(SABIC)
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
used for more severe collisions.
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
SAB may provide enhanced protection to help protect an
occupant during a side impact. The SAB is marked with
an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front
seats.
Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
2
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain Location
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downNOTE:
ward, covering both windows on the impact side.
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during
impacts that require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and front seat belt
pretensioners, as required, depending on the severity and
type of impact.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
Side Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional
protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain
frontal collisions depending on the severity and type of
collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to
reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
required for this vehicle.
including some that may produce substantial vehicle
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a severe may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all accidents, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instruaway from an inflating air bag.
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnosthe air bag system whenever the ignition is in the tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF position,
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and
the air bags will not inflate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
air bag, it signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Supplemental
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover separates and you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
folds out of the way allowing the air bag to inflate to the positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
full size. The air bag fully inflates in about 15 to 20 especially applies to children.
milliseconds.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side event the ORC will determine whether to have the
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
it is inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Cut off fuel to the engine.
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
until the ignition is cycled to off.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
Front And Side Impact Sensors
removed.
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
• Unlock the doors automatically.
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
If A Deployment Occurs
events.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
Enhanced Accident Response System
immediately after deployment.
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deabrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium bags will not be in place to protect you.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
WARNING!
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
immediately.
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Conprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
cycled to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
were buckled/fastened;
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipaccelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
vehicle or the EDR.
These data can help provide a better understanding of Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no perlaw, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
crash investigation.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
WARNING!
allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower Anthe front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air
chors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
bag unless the air bag is turned off. An air bag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
infants in this position.
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward- the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc- in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Integrated Child Booster Seat — If Equipped
The Integrated Child Booster Seat is located in each
outboard second-row passenger seat. The Booster Seat is
designed for children weighing between 48 and 85 lbs (22
and 39 kg) and between 47 in (119 cm) and 57 in (145 cm)
tall.
To position a child into the Integrated Child Booster Seat
follow these steps:
1. Slide the second row seat to the full rear position to
use the Integrated Child Booster Seat.
NOTE: The second row bench with Integrated Child
Release Loop
Booster Seat must remain in the full rear position during
3. Lift the seat cushion up and push back to lock it in the
use.
booster seat position.
2. Pull the release loop forward to release the latch and
seat cushion.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
NOTE: The lap portion of the seat belt should be low on
the hips and as snug as possible.
7. Once the seat belt is long enough to fit properly, insert
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Booster Seat
4. Place the child upright in the seat with their back
firmly against the seatback.
5. Grasp the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
6. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary 8. To remove the slack from the lap belt, pull upward on
the shoulder portion of the seat belt.
to allow the seat belt to go around the child’s lap.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the • Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
buckle.
slouching can move the belt out of position.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely
into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat
cushion could cause serious injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger air bag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
you make sure that you can install the child restraint in
the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
WARNING!
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle’s second row passenger seats are equipped
with the child restraint anchor system called LATCH. The
LATCH system provides for the installation of the child
restraint without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead
securing the child restraint using lower anchors and
upper tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchors are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchors will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
connection to the top tether anchors have been available
for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retrofit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
All three second-row passenger seating positions have
lower anchors that are capable of accommodating
LATCH-compatible child seats. You should never install
LATCH-compatible child seats so that two seats share a
common lower anchorage. If installing child seats in
adjacent seating positions, or if your child restraints are
not LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the
vehicle’s seat belts.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Installing The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions
carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
are provided with the child restraint system.
NOTE: When installing a child restraint, if it interferes
with the Head Restraint, recline the seatback slightly to
remove the interference.
Latch Anchorages
1 — Outer 60% Seating Position. Use Lower Anchor Loops A and B. If placing a
second child seat in the vehicle, use the Outer 40% Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops D and E. DO NOT USE Middle 60% Seating Position and Lower Anchorage Loops B and C.
2 — Middle 60% Seating Position. Use Lower Anchor Loops B and C. If placing a
second child seat in the vehicle, use the Outer 40% Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops D and E. DO NOT USE Outer 60% Seating Position and Lower Anchor
Loops A and B.
3 — Outer 40% Seating Position. Use Lower Anchor Loops D and E. If placing a
second child seat in the vehicle, use Outer 60% Seating Position and Lower Anchor
Loops A and B or Middle 60% Seating Position and Lower Anchor Loops B and C.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The lower anchors are round bars located at the In addition, there are tether strap anchors located behind
rear of the seat cushion where it meets the each rear seatback, near to the floor.
seatback and are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
intersection of the seatback and seat cushion surfaces.
Tether Strap Anchors
Many, but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector for attachment to the lower anchor and a
Latch Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchor and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the child
restraint rearward and downward into the seat, removing slack in the straps according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE:
You will first loosen the child seat adjusters on the lower • Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
straps and on the tether strap so that you can more easily
the strap.
attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchors.
Next, attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top • When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
of the seatcover material. Then attach the tether strap to
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
the child restraint, being careful to route the tether strap
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
to provide the most direct path between the anchor and
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
the child restraint, preferably between the head restraint
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint. This
posts underneath the head restraint. For center seating
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
position, adjust the head restraint to the upward position
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
and route the tether strap between the head restraint
that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not
posts underneath the head restraint. Then, attach the
play with them. In addition, never leave unattended
hook to the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
children in the vehicle.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with an Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or
a cinching latch plate to secure a Child Restraint System
(CRS). These types of seat belts are designed to keep the
lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint
so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
will make a ratcheting noise if you extract the entire belt
from the retractor and then allow the belt to retract into
the retractor. For additional information on ALR, refer to
“Automatic Locking Mode”. The chart below defines the
seating positions with an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) or a cinching latch plate.
First Row
Second Row
Third Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
ALR
Center
N/A
Cinch
N/A
Passenger
ALR
ALR
ALR
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next,
extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates strap between the head restraint posts underneath the
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
head restraint. Then, attach the hook to the tether anchor
located on the back of the seat.
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
NOTE: When installing a child restraint, if it interferes
with the Head Restraint, recline the seatback slightly to
remove the interference.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat,
preferably between the head restraint posts underneath
the head restraint. For center seating position, adjust the
head restraint to the upward position and route the tether
Tether Strap Mounting
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. If necessary, move the seat forward to provide better NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
access to the tether anchor.
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
Seat Track Release Lever
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the an accident.
tether anchor and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc- Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
tions.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and high-quality energy-conserving type lubricant. Oil
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
Drive moderately during the first 300 mi (500 km). After
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Veor 90 km/h) are desirable.
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrithousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
mental and should be avoided.
considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
WARNING! (Continued)
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
(Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• On seven passenger models, do not drive the
vehicle with the second row passenger seat in the
easy entry/exit position (seat cushion flipped upward and seat moved forward), as this position is
only intended for entering and exiting the third
row seats. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
• On seven passenger models, do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat with the second
row seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the
passenger could slide underneath the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
(Continued) seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised Air Bag Warning Light
The light should turn on and remain on for four to six
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, or if the
Vehicle
light stays on, flickers, or turns on while driving, have the
Seat Belts
system checked by an authorized dealer.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
Defroster
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
system.
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after inoperable.
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
Floor Mat Safety Information
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check Turn Signal and High
Beam Indicator Lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 䡵 Uconnect™ Phone (4.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Uconnect Touch™ 4.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . 102
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . 104
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Manual Folding Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . 104
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 104
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . 104
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
3
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Uconnect™ Phone (8.4/8.4N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
▫ Uconnect Touch™ 8.4/8.4 NAV . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . 177
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
▫ Uconnect™ Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . 182
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Recliner Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
▫ Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
䡵 Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Uconnect Touch™ 8.4/8.4 NAV . . . . . . . . . . 162
▫ Uconnect™ Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 165
▫ Voice Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ Third Row Passenger Seats — Seven
Passenger Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ 60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger Seats . . . . 190
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
▫ 50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats With
Fold-Flat Feature — Seven
Passenger Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
䡵 Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . 202
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 208
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
3
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Headlights With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . 212
▫ Parksense威 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
▫ Enabling And Disabling Parksense威 . . . . . . . 221
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 213
▫ Service The Parksense威 Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
▫ Cleaning The Parksense威 System . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ Parksense威 System Usage Precautions . . . . . . 222
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
䡵 Parkview威 Rear Back Up Camera — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
䡵 Parksense威 Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 217
▫ Parksense威 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Parksense威 Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Turning Parkview威 On Or Off — With Touch
Screen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
▫ Interior Observation Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
▫ Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped . . . . . . 229
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 240
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 230
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . 232
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . 235
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Power Inverter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Glovebox Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Floor Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ Flip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger
Seat Storage — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Second-Row Passenger Seat Temporary
Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
▫ Second-Row Map Pocket And Grocery
Retainers — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ In-Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner . . 255
䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight — If Equipped . . . . . 257
▫ Cargo Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 265
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window.
3
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while
set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Manual Rearview Mirror
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Failure to follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
Power Mirror Switches
Power Mirrors
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s door Models Without Express Window Feature
Press the mirror select button marked L (left) or R (right)
trim panel.
and then press one of the four arrow buttons to move the
mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Models With Express Window Feature
Press and release the mirror select button marked L (left)
or R (right) and then press one of the four arrow buttons
to move the mirror in the direction the arrow is pointing.
The selection times out after 30 seconds of inactivity in
order to guard against accidentally changing a mirror
position following an adjustment.
If the mirrors are in the folded position, and vehicle
speed is equal or greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), they will
automatically unfold.
Manual Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions:
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate forward, rearward and normal.
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Power Folding Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
The switch for the power folding mirrors is located
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right). window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
Press the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for furpressing the switch a second time will return the mirrors ther information.
to the normal driving position.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
NOTE: Pressing the power folding mirror switch for An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
more than four seconds, or if the vehicle speed is greater the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
than 5 mph (8 km/h) will disable the folding feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automati- 2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
Uconnect™ Phone (4.3)
Uconnect Touch™ 4.3
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone.
Uconnect Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated features:
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smiths MoSun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped
bile” or, “Dial 248 555-1212”),
This feature allows for additional flexibility in position• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”),
ing the visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call • Listen to Music on your Bluetooth威 Device via the
Back”),
touch-screen,
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls”, • Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
“Show Outgoing calls”, “Show missed Calls”, “Show
to connect to them quickly.
Recent Calls”),
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically
Smith Mobile”).
mute your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
Screen Activated Features:
• Dialing via Keypad using touch-screen,
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis• www.dodge.com/uconnect
played on the touch-screen,
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are • www.jeep.com/uconnect
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen,
• or call 1–877–855–8400
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
you may not be able to use any Uconnect™ Phone different electronic devices to connect to each other withfeatures. Refer to your mobile service provider or the out wires or a docking station, so Uconnect™ Phone
phone manufacturer for details.
works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone allows up to
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
ten mobile phones or audio devices to be linked to the
microphone for private conversation.
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone and
one audio device can be used with the system at a time.
WARNING!
The system is available in English, Spanish, or French
Any voice commanded system should be used only languages.
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
Uconnect™ Phone Button
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
The Uconnect™ Phone
Button is used to
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
get into the phone mode and make calls, show
accident causing serious injury or death.
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phonebook etc., When you press the button you will
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your Bluetooth威
hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect™ features
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ Voice Command Button
Button
The Uconnect™ Voice Command
is only used for “barge in” and when you are
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
make another call.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehithe beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or ancle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
other prompt.
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right • For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
switch), if so equipped.
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following comOperation
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mobile”.
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
given. You can also break the commands into parts
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. There are two general methand say each part of the command when you are asked
ods for how Voice Command works:
for it. For example, you can use the compound com1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith momand form voice command “Search for John Smith”,
bile”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
or you can break the compound command form into
two voice commands: “Search Contact” and when
asked “John Smith”. Please remember, the Uconnect™
Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few
feet/meters away from you.
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pressing
the Voice Command
button.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect™ Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Voice Command Tree
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
Help Command
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I
the beep.
would like to”.
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone from idle, simply press
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
button and say a command or say “help”. All
the
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or senbutton on the radio control head.
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and • You must have Bluetooth威 enabled on your phone to
you will be returned to the main menu.
complete this procedure.
or
buttons when the • The vehicle must be in PARK.
You can also press the
system is listening for a command and be returned to the
1. You can do either of the following:
main or previous menu.
a. Press the “Settings” hard-key, Page down to the
or
buttons while the
NOTE: Pressing the
“Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key, press it and you will see
system is playing is known as “Barging In”, refer to
the “Paired Phones” screen. If there are no paired
“Barge In — Overriding Prompts” for further informaphones you will see <Empty> as the first device name.
tion.
b. Press the MORE hard-key, then press the Phone
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone
soft-key and you will go to the Uconnect™ Phone main
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
screen. Press the “Settings” soft-key. If there are no
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
phones currently paired a pop-up will appear. If you
To complete the pairing process, you will need to referselect “Yes” you will go the “Paired Phones” screen, if
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
you select “No” you will return to the Uconnect™
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instrucPhone main menu.
tions for pairing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
2. At the “Paired Phones” screen press the “Add Device” • Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威 ensoft-key and a pop-up with instructions will appear.
abled Audio Device. When prompted on the device,
select the “Uconnect™” device and enter the PIN,
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, • Uconnect™ Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting,
select the “Uconnect™” device and enter the PIN.
4. When the pairing process has successfully completed, • When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make
is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
this device the highest priority. This device will take
phone the highest priority. This phone will take preceprecedence over other paired devices within range.
dence over other paired phones within range.
Pair A Bluetooth威 Streaming Audio Device
• Touch the “Player” hard-key to begin,
• Press the “Source” soft-key,
NOTE: If No is selected, device priority is determined
by the order in which it was paired. The latest device
paired will have the higher priority.
• Change the Source to Bluetooth威,
You can also use the following VR command to bring up
a list of paired audio devices.
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
• “Show Paired Audio Devices”
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device
Uconnect™ Phone will automatically connect to the
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device
within range. If you would need to choose a particular
Phone or Audio Device follow these steps:
• Touch the “Settings” hard-key,
• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
• Touch the “Settings” hard-key,
• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
• Select the Phone or Audio Device,
• At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Disconnect
Device” soft-key,
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
• Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Phone/
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
Audio” soft-key and then an Audio Device,
• Touch the “Settings” hard-key,
• At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Connect
• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
Device” soft-key,
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
• Select the Phone or Audio Device,
• At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Delete Device” soft-key,
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
• Touch the “Settings” hard-key,
• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook,
follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a Name”
section.
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
• At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Make Favorite” soft-key; you will see the chosen device move to • A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downthe top of the list,
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downPhonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
Transfer From Mobile Phone
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availIf equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availUconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
able for use.
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
• Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the
currently connected device,
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book • Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
phone is accessible.
website for supported phones.
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
phone connection.
• Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the task.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
Emergency And Towing Assistance
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
The 911/Help numbers can only be altered. These can not accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
be deleted or the names can not be changed.
your mobile service provider for the features that you
have.
To change the 911/Help number follow these steps.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
• Touch the “phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
screen,
with Uconnect™ Phone.
• Touch the “911/Help” soft-key. Touch the appropriate
• Redial,
listing to alter, Emergency for example,
• Dial by touching in the number,
• Once Emergency is touched, the Edit soft-key appears.
Touch the “Edit” soft-key and you will be given the • Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Number, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back),
choice to Edit Number or Reset to Default,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
• Mobile Phonebook,
• Recent Call Log.
• The Uconnect™ Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can be
Call Controls
done with 1 call or less active.
The touch-screen allows you to control the following call
Dial By Saying A Number
features:
• Press the
button to begin,
• Answer
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, •
say “Dial 248-555-1212”,
•
• The Uconnect™ Phone will dial 248-555-1212.
•
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
•
• Press the
button to begin,
•
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
•
say “Call John Doe Mobile”,
•
End
Ignore
Hold/unhold
Mute/unmute
Transfer the call to/from the phone
Swap 2 active calls
Join 2 active calls together
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Touch-Tone Number Entry
• Missed Calls
• Touch the “Phone” soft-key,
• All Calls
• Touch the “Dial” soft-key,
These can be accessed by touching the recent calls
soft-key on the Phone main screen.
• The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed,
button and say “Show my
You can also press the
• Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls
touch “Call”.
will be displayed.
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”,
button while in a call and say “1234#” or you
the
“Recent” or “Missed”.
can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail passAnswer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
word is stored in your mobile phonebook.
Currently In Progress
Recent Calls
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sysfollowing call types:
tem, if on, and will display a pop-up showing Answer or
• Incoming Calls
button on
Ignore. Press the Answer soft-key or the
the steering wheel to accept the call.
• Outgoing Calls
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Uconnect™ Phone will then interrupt the
vehicle audio system, if on, and will display a pop-up
button
showing Answer, Ignore or Transfer. Press the
to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming
call.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. Or you can place a call on hold by touching
the “Hold” soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial
a number from the dialpad, recent calls or from the
phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
to “Join Calls” in this section.
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
button until you hear a single beep,
press the
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time. Also you can press the Swap soft-key on the Phone
main screen.
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Join Calls
• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
was dialed from your mobile phone.
hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone main
Call Continuation
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the End switched to OFF.
soft-key or the
button. Only the active call(s) will be
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
far end, a call on hold may not become active automaticessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
cally. This is cell phone-dependent.
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
Redial
Uconnect™ Phone Features
• Press the “Redial” soft-key,
Emergency Assistance
• or press the
button and after the “Listening” If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial”,
reachable:
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, • Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
say “Redial”,
number for your area.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is • The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
follows:
for the mobile phone directly.
• Press the
button to begin,
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will
instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
and Mexico.
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect™ Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
• Press the
button to begin,
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Towing Assistance”.
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler
Group LLC 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage
details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the
24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect™ Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize
Voice Mail Calling
button and say the
the touch-screen or press the
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working word “Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For
with Automated Systems”.
example, if required to enter your PIN followed with a
button and
pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can press the
Working With Automated Systems
say, “Send 3 7 4 6 #”. Saying “Send” followed by a
This method is used in instances where one generally has
number, or sequence of numbers, is also to be used for
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated customer service cennavigating through an automated telephone system.
ter menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phonebook entry and/or Last Name as “Voice Password”, then
button and say “Send Voicemail
if you press the
Password”, the Uconnect™ Phone will then send the
corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth威.
These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing a numbered sequence.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The
button can be used when you wish to skip part
of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately.
For example, if a prompt is asking “There are 2 numbers
NOTE:
with the name John. Say the full name” you could press
• The first number encountered for that contact will be the
button and say, “John Smith” to select that
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be option without having to listen to the rest of the voice
ignored.
prompt.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone Voice Response Length
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
network configurations. This is normal.
Detailed Voice Response Length.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the • Touch the “More” hard-key, then touch the “Settings”
soft-key,
use of this feature.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
Voice Response Length,
as if you dial the number using voice command.
• Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle
show your selection.
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situaPhone And Network Status Indicators
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
Uconnect™ Phone will provide notification to inform
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
you of your phone and network status when you are
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect™
audio.
Phone. The status is given for roaming, network signal
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
strength and phone battery strength.
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone simply touch the
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
“Mute” button on the Phone main screen.
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- Voice Command
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
button on the Phone main screen.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
you.
connection between a Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
phone and the Uconnect™ Phone, follow the instructions
during a voice command period.
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
• When navigating through an automated system such
compromised with the convertible top down.
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
Far End Audio Performance
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• Storing names in your favorites phonebook when the
• low-to-medium blower setting,
vehicle is not in motion is recommended.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
OFF/ON. Your cellular phone is recommended to remain
in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
• Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
NOTE:
• If your phone does not support phonebook download
• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
or call log download over Bluetooth than these commobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
mands will return a response that the contact does not
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
exist in the phonebook.
which phone number you want to send a message to
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
for John Smith.
underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or
General Information
“Other”.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
Calls” or “Missed Calls”.
following conditions:
• Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect • Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
the party responsible for compliance could void the
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone •
number supported by your Mobile phone.
•
• You can replace “4” with any message number shown
on the screen.
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ Phone (8.4/8.4N)
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”).
Uconnect Touch™ 8.4/8.4 Nav
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- • View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls”,
vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al“Show Outgoing calls”, “Show missed Calls”, “Show
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
Recent Calls”).
phone.
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Smith Mobile”).
Uconnect™ Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated Features:
Screen Activated Features:
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smiths Mo- •
bile” or, “Dial 248 555-1212”).
•
• Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.
•
• Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John
Smiths Mobile”).
•
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
•
Dialing via Keypad using touch-screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks displayed on the touch-screen.
Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so the are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
• Sending a text message via the touch-screen.
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth威 Device via the • or call 1–877–855–8400
touch-screen.
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
to connect to them quickly.
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth威 for messaging features to work properly.
WARNING!
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in an
accident causing serious injury or death.
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威 technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be
linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
phone and one audio device can be used with the system
at a time. The system is available in English, Spanish, or
French languages.
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phonebook etc.,
When you press the button you will hear a BEEP. The
beep is your signal to give a command.
Uconnect™ Voice Command Button
The Uconnect™ Voice Command
Button
is only used for “barge in” and when you are
already in a call and you want to send Tones or
make another call.
button is also used to access the Voice
The
Commands for the Uconnect™ Voice Command features
if your vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect™
Voice Command section for direction on how to use the
button.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehiUconnect™ Phone Button
Button is used to cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone
get into the phone mode and make calls, show can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Operation
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following commenu structure. Voice commands are required after most
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith moUconnect™ Phone prompts. There are two general methbile”.
ods for how Voice Command works:
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mogiven. You can also break the commands into parts
bile”.
and say each part of the command when you are asked
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
for it. For example, you can use the compound comguide you to complete the task.
mand form voice command “Search for John Smith”,
or you can break the compound command form into
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
two voice commands: “Search Contact” and when
guided through the available options.
asked “John Smith”. Please remember, the Uconnect™
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
Phone works best when you talk in a normal converthe beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or ansational tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few
other prompt.
feet/meters away from you.
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect™ Phone Voice system uses a Natural requires more information from the user it will ask a
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
question to which the user can respond without pressing
button.
the Voice Command
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out Voice Command Tree
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I
Help Command
would like to”.
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly the beep.
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or senTo activate the Uconnect™ Phone from idle, simply press
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
button and say a command or say “help”. All
the
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
button on the radio control head.
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
You can also press the
or
buttons when the • The vehicle must be in PARK.
system is listening for a command and be returned to the
1. Press the “Phone” soft-key on the screen to begin.
main or previous menu.
2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
or
buttons while the
NOTE: Pressing the
system, a pop-up will appear.
system is playing is known as “Barging In”, refer to
“Barge In — Overriding Prompts” for further
information.
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
NOTE:
• You must have Bluetooth威 enabled on your phone to
complete this procedure.
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Select Yes to begin the pairing process. Then, search
for available devices on your Bluetooth威 enabled mobile
phone. When prompted on the phone, enter the name
and PIN shown on the Uconnect Touch™ screen.
• If No is selected, touch the “Settings” soft-key from
the Uconnect™ Phone main screen,
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威
enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the
phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the
Uconnect Touch™ screen,
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not this
is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this phone
4. Uconnect™ Phone will display an in process screen
the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over
while the system is connecting.
other paired phones within range.
• See Step 4 to complete the process.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
• Touch the “More” soft-key to begin,
• Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
• Next, touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone,
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect
Touch™ screen,
• Uconnect™ Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting,
NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
• When the pairing process has successfully completed,
priority.
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make this
phone the highest priority. This phone will take precedence over other paired phones within range.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can also use the following VR commands to bring up • Uconnect™ Phone will display an in process screen
the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
while the system is connecting,
• “Show Paired Phones” or
• “Connect My Phone”
Pair A Bluetooth威 Streaming Audio Device
• Touch the “Player” soft-key to begin,
• Change the Source to Bluetooth威,
• Touch the “Bluetooth威” soft-key,
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key,
• When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make
this device the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within range.
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The latest device paired will have the higher
priority.
You can also use the following VR command to bring up
NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the
a list of paired audio devices.
system, a pop-up will appear.
• “Show Paired Audio Devices”
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth威 enabled audio device. When prompted on the device,
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect
Touch™ screen,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
• Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
Audio Device
name,
Uconnect™ Phone will automatically connect to the
• The options pop-up will be displayed,
highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device
within range. If you would need to choose a particular • Touch the “Disconnect Device” soft-key,
phone or Audio Device follow these steps:
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
• Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
• Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
• Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Paired
• Touch the Phone/Bluetooth威 soft-key,
Audio Sources” soft-key and then an Audio Device,
• Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
name for a different Phone or Audio Device than the
Disconnecting A Phone or Audio Device
currently connected device,
• Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
• The options pop-up will be displayed,
• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
• Touch the “Delete Device” soft-key,
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
• Touch the “Settings” soft-key,
• Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth威” soft-key,
• Touch the + soft-key located to the right of the device
name,
• The options pop-up will be displayed,
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
website for supported phones.
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phonebook,
follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a Name”
section.
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
• Touch the “Make Favorite” soft-key; you will see the
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
chosen device move to the top of the list,
start the vehicle.
• Touch the X to exit out of the Settings screen.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downPhonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
Transfer From Mobile Phone
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downUconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail- 2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select phoneable, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail- book from the Phone main screen, then select the appropriate number. Touch the + next to the selected number to
able for use.
display the options pop-up. In the pop-up select “Add to
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
Favorites”.
phone is accessible.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
phone connection.
Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
There are three ways you can add an entry to your
Favorite Phonebook.
1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
touch and hold a favorite button on the top of the phone
main screen.
NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. From the Phone main screen, select phonebook. From
the phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” soft-key and
then select the + soft-key located to the right of the
phonebook record. Select an empty entry and touch the +
on that selected entry. When the Options pop-up appears,
touch “Add from Mobile”. You will then be asked which
contact and number to choose from your mobile phonebook. When complete the new favorite will be shown.
To Remove A Favorite
• To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the
Phone main screen.
• Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
then touch the + Options soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
• Touch the + next to the Favorite you would like to Emergency And Towing Assistance
The Emergency and Towing Favorite numbers can only
remove.
be altered. These cannot be deleted and the names cannot
be changed.
To change the Emergency or Towing number follow these
steps.
• Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
screen.
• Touch the “Favorites” soft-key. Next scroll to the
bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and Towing
Favorites.
• The Options pop-up will display, touch “Remove from
Favs”.
• Touch the + Options soft-key.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Touch the + next to appropriate Favorite that is to be Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
altered.
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth威 on your mobile service plan.
For example, if your mobile service plan provides threeway calling, this feature can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
with Uconnect™ Phone.
• Redial
• Dial by touching in the number
• The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose
between Editing the number or resetting the number • Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back)
to default.
• Favorite Phonebook
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
• Mobile Phonebook
• Recent Call Log
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call John Doe Mobile”,
• The Uconnect™ Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can be
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
done with 1 call or less active.
Call Controls
Dial By Saying A Number
The touch-screen allows you to control the following call
features:
button to begin,
• Press the
• Answer
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
• End
say “Dial 248-555-1212”,
• SMS Message Viewer
• The Uconnect™ Phone will dial the number •
248-555-1212.
•
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
•
button to begin,
• Press the
•
Ignore
Hold/unhold
Mute/unmute
Transfer the call to/from the phone
• Swap 2 active calls
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Join 2 active calls together
Touch-Tone Number Entry
• Touch the “Phone” soft-key,
Recent Calls
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
• Touch the “Dial” soft-key,
• The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed,
• Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and
touch “Call”.
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press
button while in a call and say “Send 1234#” or
the
you can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail
password is stored in your mobile phonebook.
• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls
• Missed Calls
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
• All Calls
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
These can be accessed by touching the “recent calls”
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
soft-key on the Phone main screen.
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
button and say “Show my call waiting that you normally hear when using your
You can also press the
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming calls mobile phone. Press the phone
button, answer
soft-key or caller ID box to place the current call on hold
will be displayed.
and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”,
“Recent” or “Missed”.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Currently In Progress
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys- Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the Progress
button to accept the call. To ignore the To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
call. Press the
call, touch the “Ignore” soft-key on the touch-screen. You press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
can also touch the “answer” soft-key or touch the blue by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
caller ID box.
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
in progress. Or you can place a call on hold by touching
the Hold soft-key on the Phone main screen, then dial a
number from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from
the phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to
“Toggling Between Calls” in this section. To combine two
calls, refer to “Join Calls” in this section.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), touch the “Join Calls” soft-key on the Phone main
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
button or the end soft-key. Only the active call(s) will be
During an active call, touch the “Hold” soft-key on the terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become
Phone main screen.
the new active call. If the active call is terminated by the
far end, a call on hold may not become active automatiToggling Between Calls
cally. This is cell phone-dependent.
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
touch the “Swap” soft-key on the Phone main screen. Redial
Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
• Press the “Redial” soft-key,
button to toggle between the
You can also press the
• or press the
and after the “Listening” prompt and
active and held phone call.
the following beep, say “Redial”,
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Redial”,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
• The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
was dialed from your mobile phone.
follows:
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the • Press the
button to begin.
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
switched to OFF.
say “Call Emergency or Dial Emergency” and the
Uconnect™ Phone will instruct the paired mobile
NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio
phone to call the emergency number. This feature is
system until the phone becomes out of range for the
supported in the U.S., Canada, and Mexico.
Bluetooth威 connection. It is recommended to press the
“transfer” soft-key when leaving the vehicle.
NOTE:
Uconnect™ Phone Features
• The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the
touch-screen.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is • The emergency number dialed is based on the country
reachable:
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
number for your area.
area.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your NOTE:
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that • The towing assistance call may also be initiated by
touch.
for the mobile phone directly.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect™ Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
• Press the
button to begin.
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler
Group LLC 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage
details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the
24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
say “Towing Assistance”.
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect™ Phone.
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phonebook entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail
button and say
Password”, then if you press the
“Send Voicemail Password” the Uconnect™ Phone will
then send the corresponding phone number associated
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone
with the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize NOTE:
button and say the • The first number encountered for that contact will be
the touch-screen or press the
word “Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
example, if required to enter your PIN followed with a
ignored.
button and
pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can press the
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
say, “Send 3 7 4 6 #”. Saying “Send” followed by a
network configurations. This is normal.
number, or sequence of numbers, is also to be used for
navigating through an automated customer service cen- • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
ter menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
use of this feature.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by • Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth威.
Voice Response Length,
These additional symbols will be ignored in the dial• Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box
ing a numbered sequence.
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
show your selection.
The
button can be used when you wish to skip part
Phone And Network Status Indicators
of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately.
Uconnect™ Phone will provide notification to inform
For example, if a prompt is asking “There are 2 numbers
you of your phone and network status when you are
with the name John. Say the full name” you could press
attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect™
button and say, “John Smith” to select that
the
Phone. The status is given for network signal strength
option without having to listen to the rest of the voice
and phone battery strength.
prompt.
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
Voice Response Length
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
Detailed Voice Response Length.
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
• Touch the “More” soft-key, then touch the “Settings” caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
soft-key,
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same Advanced Phone Connectivity
as if you dial the number using voice command.
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be transdial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa- without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the
that the call did not go through even though the call is in Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the Transfer
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the button on the Phone main screen.
audio.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
able to hear the conversation coming from the other connection between a Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In phone and the Uconnect™ Phone, follow the instructions
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone simply touch the described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
Mute button on the Phone main screen.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
Voice Command
• fully closed windows,
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
• dry weather condition.
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
• When navigating through an automated system such
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
as voice mail, or when sending a page, before speaking
you.
the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
• Storing names in your favorites phonebook when the
during a voice command period.
vehicle is not in motion is recommended.
• Performance is maximized under:
• Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition
• low-to-medium blower setting,
rate is optimized when the entries are not similar.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
• Even though international dialing for most number • Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
number combinations may not be supported.
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
compromised with the convertible top down.
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
SMS
Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth威 in order
to use this feature. If the Uconnect™ Phone determines
your phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over
Bluetooth威 the “Messaging” button will be greyed out
and the feature will not be available for use.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Uconnect™ Phone SMS is only available when
the vehicle is not in moving.
Once a message is received and viewed or listened to,
you will have the following options:
Read Messages:
• Send a Reply
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
• Forward
connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will
be made to notify you that you have a new text message. • Call
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Send Messages Using Soft-Keys:
You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send
a new message:
• Touch the “Phone” soft-key,
3
• Touch the “messaging” soft-key then “New Message”,
• Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person
you wish to send the message to,
• If multiple numbers are available for the contact select
which number you would like to have the message
sent,
• Press “Send” or “Cancel”.
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Send Messages Using Voice Commands:
• Press the
button,
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Send message to John Smith mobile”,
• After the system prompts you for what message you
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
“List”. There are 18 preset messages.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
button and
interrupt the system by pressing the
saying the message you want to send.
List of Preset Messages:
After the system confirms that you want to send your
1. Yes.
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
2. No.
3. Okay.
4. I can’t talk right now.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
5. Call me.
15. Are you there yet?
6. I’ll call you later.
16. I need directions.
7. I’m on my way.
17. I’m lost.
8. Thanks.
18. See you later.
9. I’ll be late.
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain
in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
10. I will be <number> minutes late.
11. See you in <number> minutes.
12. Stuck in traffic.
13. Start without me.
14. Where are you?
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
NOTE:
• You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
number supported by your Mobile phone.
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
• You can replace “4” with any message number shown
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
on the screen.
which phone number you want to send a message to
• If your phone does not support phonebook download
for John Smith.
or call log download over Bluetooth than these com• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or
mands will return a response that the contact does not
“Other”.
exist in the phonebook.
• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
Calls” or “Missed Calls”.
underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
• Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
NOTE:
• If your phone does not support phonebook download
• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
or call log download over Bluetooth than these commobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
mands will return a response that the contact does not
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
exist in the phonebook.
which phone number you want to send a message to
• Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
for John Smith.
underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home”, “Work” or
General Information
“Other”.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
Calls” or “Missed Calls”.
following conditions:
• Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect • Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
the party responsible for compliance could void the
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone •
number supported by your Mobile phone.
•
• You can replace “4” with any message number shown
on the screen.
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
VOICE COMMAND
Uconnect Touch™ 8.4/8.4 Nav
The Uconnect™ Voice Command system allows you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod and
Sirius Travel Link.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws. All
attention should be kept on the roadway ahead.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command
system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of When you press the Uconnect™ Voice Command
the Voice Command system to recognize user voice button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to
commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking give a command.
or a raised voice level.
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two
responses:
• I didn’t understand
• I didn’t get that, etc.,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
If a command is not spoken a second time, the system
will respond with an error and give some direction as
what can be said based on the context you are in. After
three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR
session with end.
button
Pressing the Uconnect™ Voice Command
while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.”
The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you
can say a command. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or
“Help”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear available commands, press the Uconnect™ Voice
button and say “Help”. You will hear
Command
available commands for the screen displayed.
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Natural Speech
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh”. The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to”.
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pressing
button.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase the Uconnect™ Voice Command
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith”. For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Uconnect™ Voice Commands
The Uconnect™ Voice Command system understands
two types of commands. Universal commands are available at all times. Local commands are available if the
supported radio mode is active.
Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session in
Radio/Player Modes
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when
a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect™ Voice
button.
Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect™ Voice Com- Command
button.
mand
Disc
Changing the Volume
To switch to the disc mode, say “Change source to Disc”.
This command can be given in any mode or screen:
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
NOTE:
3. You can replace “8” with any other satellite station
1. You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM named received by the radio.
frequency, such as “98.7 FM”.
4. You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music
2. You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite types.
station name received by the radio.
5. Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face
and shaded grey.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
NOTE:
3. Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
1. You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist, available when the iPod is connected and playing.
podcast and audio book names with any corresponding
4. VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
names on the current device that is playing.
based on the music database provided by Gracenote.
2. You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is
5. Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face
currently playing. Command is only available when CD
and shaded grey.
is playing.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
NOTE:
3. You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
1. You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or “Show
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show ski info” to get other forecasts.
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines”.
4. Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face
2. You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items and shaded grey.
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams”.
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
NOTE:
1. Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
3. Navigation commands only work if equipped with
Navigation.
2. You can replace “Player” with “Radio”, “Navigation”, 4. Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face
“Phone”, “Climate”, “More” or “Settings”.
and shaded grey.
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
NOTE:
1. You can also say “Find City”, “Find Favorite”, “Find
Play by Category”, “Find Play by Name”, “Find Recently
Found”, “Where to?” or “Go Home”.
2. You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant”, “Fuel”,
“Transit”, “Lodging”, “Shopping”, “Bank”, “Entertainment”, “Recreation”, “Attractions”, “Community”,
“Auto Services”, “Hospitals”, “Parking”, “Airport”, “Police Stations”, “Fire Stations”, or “Auto Dealers”.
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
The power seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat
face and shaded grey.
near the floor. Use this switch to move the seat up, down,
SEATS
forward, rearward or to tilt the seat.
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seat Switch
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward; the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position is reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch; the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch; the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
The Power Lumbar switch is located on the outboard side
of the driver’s seat. Push the switch forward to increase
the lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to dePower Lumbar Switch
crease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will raise or lower the position of the Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
support.
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks. The heated seats are operated using the
Uconnect™ Touch System.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch™ 4.3:
Touch the CLIMATE hard-key (located on the left side of
the Uconnect Touch™ display) to enter the climate control screen.
Touch the “Driver” or “Pass” seat soft-key
(located on the Uconnect Touch™ display)
once to select HI-level heating. Touch the softkey a second time to select LO-level heating.
Touch the soft-key a third time to shut the heating
elements OFF.
For Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch™ 8.4
and 8.4 Nav:
Touch the “Controls” soft-key located on the Uconnect
Touch™ display.
Controls Soft-Key
Touch the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat softkey once to select HI-level heating. Touch the
soft-key a second time to select LO-level heating. Touch the soft-key a third time to shut the
heating elements OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the
system will automatically switch to LO-level after a
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
WARNING!
Heated Seats Soft-Key
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
Manual Front Seat Adjustments
For models equipped with manual seats, the driver and
passenger seats can be adjusted forward or rearward by
using a bar located by the front of the seat cushion, near
the floor.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Manual Seat Adjustment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located and
move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once
the desired position has been reached. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, lift the
lever, lean back to the desired position and release the
lever. To return the seatback to its normal upright position, lean forward and lift the lever. Release the lever
once the seatback is in the upright position.
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Seatback Release
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be adjusted properly and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Driver’s Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The seat height control lever is located on the outboard
side of the seat. Raise the lever to raise the seat. Lower the
lever to lower the seat. The total seat travel is approximately 2.15 in (55 mm).
Seat Height Adjustment Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped
Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold the
This feature allows for extended cargo space. When the seat.
seat is folded flat, it is an extension of the load floor
WARNING!
surface (allowing long cargo to fit from the rear hatch up
to the instrument panel). The fold-flat seatback also has a
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
hardback surface that you can use as a work surface when
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
the seat is folded flat and the vehicle is not in motion.
cause you to lose control. Adjust any seat only while
the vehicle is parked.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Fold-Flat Seat
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
Active Head Restraints (AHR) — Front Seats
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compodownward on the head restraint.
nents, and vehicles with this equipment can not be
readily identified by any markings, only through visual
inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be
split in two halves, with the front half being soft foam
and trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
3
Push Button
For comfort, the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Supplemental
Active Head Restraints (AHR)/Resetting Active Head
Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before Starting
Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they
are struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured, as loose cargo could contact the Active Head
Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow
this warning could cause personal injury if the
Active Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Second Row Seats
The rear seats are equipped with adjustable head reAdjustment Button
straints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the NOTE:
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the • The head restraints should only be removed by qualiadjustment button, located on the base of the head
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If any of the
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
head restraints require removal, see your authorized
dealer.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether, refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle”.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints removed or
improperly adjusted could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. The head restraints
should be checked prior to operating the vehicle and
never adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
without having the head restraint unfolded and
locked in place. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury to the passenger in the event
of a collision.
60/40 Split Second-Row Passenger Seats
To provide additional storage area, each second-row
passenger seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some seating room
if needed.
Third Row Passenger Seats — Seven Passenger
Models
These head restraints are non-adjustable and non- NOTE: Prior to folding the second-row passenger seat,
removable. However, you can fold them forward when make sure the front seatback is not in a reclined position.
they are not in use by passengers. Refer to “50/50 Split This will allow the second-row seat to fold easily.
Third-Row Passenger Seats With Fold-Flat Feature —
Seven Passenger Models” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• On seven passenger models, do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat with the second
row seatback(s) folded flat. In a collision, the
passenger could slide underneath the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured.
To Fold The Seat
1. Locate the control lever on the lower outboard side of
the seat.
3
Seatback Release
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place one hand on the seatback and apply a gentle To Unfold The Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it in place.
pressure.
3. Lift the control lever with the other hand, allow the
seatback to move forward slightly, and then release the
lever.
WARNING!
To prevent personal injury or damage to objects,
keep your head, arms, and objects out of the folding
path of the seatback.
4. Gently guide the seatback into the folded position.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
The control lever is on the outboard side of the seat. Lift
the lever to move the seat forward or rearward. Release
the lever once the seat is in the desired position. Then,
using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
adjusted properly and you could be injured. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
Manual Seat Adjustment
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Recliner Adjustment
The recline lever is on the outboard side of the seat. To
recline the seatback, lean back, lift the lever, position the
seatback as desired, and then release the lever. To return
the seatback to its normal upright position, lean back, lift
the lever, lean forward, and then release the lever once
the seatback is in the upright position.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be adjusted properly and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Raise the seatback/armrest and lock it in place when not
Seatback/Armrest — Second Row Passenger Seat
The latch release-loop is located at the top of the in use, or when additional seating area is required.
seatback/armrest. Pull the release-loop forward to reWARNING!
lease the latch and then downward to lower the
seatback/armrest.
Keep the latch clean and free of objects and be
certain that the seatback/armrest is locked securely
into position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
Stadium Tip ’n Slide™ (Easy Entry/Exit Seat) —
Seven Passenger Models
This feature allows passengers to easily enter or exit the
third-row passenger seats from either side of the vehicle.
To Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat Forward
Seatback/Armrest
NOTE: Raise the seatback/armrest before moving the
seat to allow for full seat travel.
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Move the control lever on the upper outboard side of the
seatback forward. Then, in one fluid motion, the seat
cushion flips upward and the seat moves forward on its
tracks.
Tip n Slide Seat™
NOTE: A hand-grip is molded into the front of each
quarter trim panel near the door opening to assist entry
and exit from the third-row passenger seats.
Tip ’n Slide™ Control Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the seat in this position, as it is only intended for entering and exiting
the third row seats. Failure to follow this warning
may result in personal injury.
Be certain that the seatback and seat are locked
securely into position. Otherwise, the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats and/or
passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause
serious injury.
To Unfold And Move The Second-Row Passenger Seat
Rearward
50/50 Split Third-Row Passenger Seats With
Fold-Flat Feature — Seven Passenger Models
1. Move the seatback rearward until it locks in place and
To provide additional storage area, each third-row pasthen continue sliding the seat rearward on its tracks until
senger seatback can be folded flat. This allows for exit locks in place.
tended cargo space and still maintains some rear seating
room if needed.
2. Push the seat cushion downward to lock it in place.
3. Adjust the seat track position as desired. Using body NOTE: Prior to folding the third-row passenger seatpressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be back, make sure the second-row passenger seatback is
not in a reclined position. This will allow the seatback to
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
fold easily.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Fold The Seatback
Pull the latch release-loop located at the top of the
seatback upward, push the seatback forward slightly, and
release the release-loop. Then, continue to push the
seatback forward. The head restraints will fold automatically as the seatback moves forward.
To Unfold The Seatback
Grasp the assist strap loop on the seatback and pull it
toward you to raise the seatback. Continue to raise the
seatback until it locks in place. Raise the head restraint to
lock it in place.
Assist Strap
Seatback Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
The seatback can also be locked in the reclined position.
To do so, pull the latch release-loop located at the top of
the seatback upward, allow the seatback to recline, and
release the release-loop.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
without having the head restraint unfolded and
locked in place. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury to the passenger in the
event of a collision.
• Do not allow a passenger to sit in a third row seat
with the second row seatback(s) folded flat. In a
collision, the passenger could slide underneath the
seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured.
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Outside of the vehicle, locate the safety latch lever
near the center of the grille between the grille and hood
opening. Push the safety latch lever to the right and then
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
raise the hood.
of the instrument panel.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
Hood Release
Underhood Safety Latch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole
on the underside of the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage:
• Before closing hood, make sure the hood prop rod
is fully seated into its storage retaining clips.
• Do not slam the hood to close it. Use a firm
downward push at the center front edge of the
hood to ensure that both latches engage. Never
drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed,
with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Hood Prop Rod
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking lights and instrument panel light operation.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light
instrument panel. This switch controls the operation of the
operation.
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights. Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn the
ignition switch OFF. To turn the automatic system off,
move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
LIGHTS
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off, if they were turned on by this feature.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
If you turn the headlights, parking lights or ignition
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
switch ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch™ System,
refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an
unlit area.
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable
using the Uconnect Touch™ System, refer to “Uconnect
Touch™ Settings — Customer Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights will turn ON the first time
the vehicle is shifted out of PARK, and remain ON unless
the parking brake is applied. Upon returning to the
PARK position, the DRLs will turn OFF. DRLs will turn
OFF when the ignition is switched OFF.
NOTE: The daytime running lights can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect Touch™ System, refer to
“Uconnect Touch™ Settings — Customer Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights,
either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off
the headlight switch.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate when the low beam
headlights or parking lights are on. However, selecting
the high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
3
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
Interior Lights
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
turn signal on.
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
Lane Change Assist
interior lights were switched on manually or are on
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond because a door is open. This includes the glove box light,
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash but not the trunk light. To restore interior light operation,
three times then automatically turn off.
either turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light
switch.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch Dimmer Controls
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever The dimmer controls are part of the headlight switch and
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam. are located on the left side of the instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Rotating the left dimmer control upward with the park- Dome Light Position
ing lights or headlights on will increase the brightness of Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
the instrument panel lights.
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
Rotating the right dimmer control upward with the parkposition.
ing lights or headlights on will increase the brightness of
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
the door map pockets and cupholders, if equipped.
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom off
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
Dimmer Controls
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Refer to “Overhead Console” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located at the end of the lever. For information on using
the rear window wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window
Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper system when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause
between cycles, desirable. Rotate the end of the windshield wiper/washer control lever to one of the first five
detents to select the desired delay interval.
There are five delay settings, which allow you to regulate
the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every two
seconds to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds
between cycles at vehicle speeds below 10 mph
(16 km/h). At speeds greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), the
delay varies from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between
cycles.
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
delay times will be doubled.
Front Wiper Control
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The wipers will automatically return to the
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past “park” position if you turn OFF the ignition switch while
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. they are operating. The wipers will resume operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent when you turn the ignition switch back to the ON
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera- position.
tion.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers OFF when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than OFF.
• In cold weather, always turn OFF the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the park position
before turning OFF the engine. If the wiper switch
is left ON and the wipers freeze to the windshield,
damage to the wiper motor may occur when the
vehicle is restarted.
Front Wiper Control
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned OFF, and the blades cannot return to the
“park” position, damage to the wiper motor may
occur.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the second detent.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the delay range, the wipers will operate in low-speed for
two or three wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in
the OFF position, the wipers will operate for two or three
wipe cycles and then turn OFF.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mist Feature
Push the washer knob, located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to the first detent to activate a
single wipe cycle to clear the windshield of road mist or
spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will continue to
operate until you release the lever.
NOTE: The “Headlights With Wipers” feature can be
turned on and off using the Uconnect Touch™ System,
refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
the steering column.
Headlights With Wipers
(Available With Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned ON
if the multifunction lever (on the left side of the steering
column) is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the
headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned OFF
if they were turned ON by this feature.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, pull the control handle upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Handle
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
downward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
right side of the steering wheel.
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inspeed and on level ground before pressing the SET crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
button.
increase until the button is released, then the new set
To Deactivate
speed will be established.
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without (2 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF the button results in an increase of 1 mph (2 km/h).
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(2 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (2 km/h).
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense威 System
Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense姞 Sensors
The four ParkSense威 sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense威 will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSense姞 Warning Display
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The ParkSense威 Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect
changed to the ON/RUN position.
Touch™ System. Refer to “Uconnect Touch™ Settings” in
ParkSense威 can be active only when the shift lever is in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inREVERSE. If ParkSense威 is enabled at this shift lever
formation.
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or The ParkSense威 Warning screen is located within the Elecabove. The system will become active again if the vehicle tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides visual
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately warnings to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/
bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic
6 mph (9 km/h).
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ParkSense姞 Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
Park Assist System Off
Park Assist Ready
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
3
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Display Message
Arcs
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Park Assist
Ready
None
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2Slow
Second Tone
Warning Object
Warning Object
Detected
Detected
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense姞
ParkSense威 can be enabled and disabled using the
Uconnect Touch™ System. The available choices are: Off,
Sound Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect
Touch™ Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
Warning Object
Detected
2 Slow
Flashing
Warning Object
Detected
1 Slow
Flashing
When the ParkSense威 soft-key is pressed to disable the
system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the EVIC will display the
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Service The ParkSense姞 Rear Park Assist System
When the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system is malfunctioning, the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
cycle, and it will display the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST”,
“SERVICE PARK ASSIST”, or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is
moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a fault
condition, the EVIC will display the “CLEAN PARK
ASSIST ”, “SERVICE PARK ASSIST”, or the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense威
will not operate.
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST” appears in the EVIC make
sure the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice,
mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition.
If the message appears again, see an authorized dealer.
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense姞 System
Clean the ParkSense威 sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the sensors.
ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威 system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense威.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
• When you turn ParkSense威 off, the EVIC will display
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the EVIC will
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for
as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense威 system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST” message to be displayed in the EVIC.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense威 is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense威 in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense威.
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
• Before using the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist
system, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the warning display turns on the
single flashing arc and sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
PARKVIEW姞 REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView威 camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the
center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to
a hitch/receiver. The static grid lines will show separate
zones that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView威 Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威 should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView威 camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView威 to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView威.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — With Touch
Screen Radio
1. Turn the Radio on.
2. Press the “More” soft-key.
3. Press the “Settings” soft-key.
4. Press the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
5. Press the check box soft key next to “Parkview威
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Overhead Console
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
Courtesy/Reading
Lights
storage for sunglasses, an interior observation mirror and
The
overhead
console
has two courtesy lights. The lights
an optional power sunroof switch.
turn on when a front door, a sliding door or the liftgate is
opened. If your vehicle is equipped with Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) the lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter is pressed. The
3
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
courtesy lights also function as reading lights. Press in on
each lens to turn these lights on while inside the vehicle.
Press the lens a second time to turn each light off. You
may adjust the direction of these lights by pressing the
outside ring, which is identified with four directional
arrows.
Sunglasses Storage
To access the storage compartment, press on the raised
bars on the compartment door in the center of the console
and release and the door will swing downward.
Sunglass Storage Compartment
Courtesy/Reading Light
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
Interior Observation Mirror
The convex interior observation mirror provides the
driver and front seat passenger a wide field of view to
conveniently view passengers sitting in the rear passenger seats. To use the interior observation mirror, press on
the raised bars on the compartment door and release (the
door will swing downward), then raise the door until it is
almost closed and release. The door will latch in position
to use the interior observation mirror.
NOTE: From the “observation mirror” position, the
door can only be closed.
Observation Mirror
To return to the full open position, the door must first be
closed and then opened by pressing the latch again to Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped
Refer to “Power Sunroof” in “Understanding the Fearelease.
tures of Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink威 unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink威 channels. The HomeLink威 indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Overhead Consoles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink威
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink威
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Secuprogramming HomeLink威 for the first time. Do not
rity Alarm is active.
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink姞
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
before you begin programming.
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威 NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
button you want to program and the hand-held transmit- step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
ter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi- HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
cator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
and then rapidly after Homelink威 has received the fre- activates, programming is complete.
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not
both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly
press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
On some garage door openers/devices there may be a To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is follow these steps:
in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until 4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indithe indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not cator light. The Homelink威 indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after Homelink威 has received the frerelease the button.
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programboth buttons after the indicator light changes from slow
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
to rapid.
steps.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
and observe the indicator light.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programbefore 1995.
ming is complete and the garage door/device
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
should activate when the HomeLink威 button is
pressed.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
• To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
NOT erase the channels.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威
button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
follow these steps:
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
door or gate motor.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
release the button.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- 2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remain- away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
ing steps.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator
light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigtrained.
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage door follow these steps:
may open and close while you are programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
and observe the indicator light.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program- release the button.
ming is complete and the garage door/device
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
should activate when the HomeLink威 button is
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
pressed.
follow all remaining steps.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
Using HomeLink姞
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO
To operate, press and release the programmed
NOT erase the channels.
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lightprogramming, plug it back in at this time.
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
Security
Troubleshooting Tips
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
in your vehicle.
are some of the most common solutions:
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitter.
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
erased.
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press
the switch forward and release to Express Close.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re- Sunshade Operation
sult in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
disabled.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
Pinch Protect Override
open.
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing
Wind Buffeting
the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for two
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
to move toward the closed position.
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurpressed.
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
Venting Sunroof — Express
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
Press and release the “Vent” button, and the sunroof will
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunroof Maintenance
Sunroof Fully Closed
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
the glass panel.
sunroof is fully closed.
Ignition Off Operation
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature.
NOTE: The delay time if programmable using the
Uconnect Touch™ system. Refer to “Uconnect Touch™
System” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
A 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet located in the center
console below the radio. The power outlet has power
available when the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or
ACC position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
A second 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet is located inside
the center console storage area. Power is available with
the ignition switch in the ON/RUN, ACC or LOCK
position.
3
Front 12 Volt Power Outlet
This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit. To preserve the heating element, do not
hold the lighter in the heating position.
Center Console 12 Volt Power Outlet
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
A third fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the back
of the center console. This power outlet has power
available when the ignition switch is in the LOCK, ON or
ACC position.
A fourth fused 12 Volt power outlet is located on the left
quarter trim panel in the cargo area. This power outlet
has power available when the ignition switch is in the
ON or ACC position.
Rear Seat 12 Volt Power Outlet
Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob
and element must be used.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• The power outlet on the bottom of the center
console shares the fuse with the power outlet on
the back of the console. The combined usage must
not exceed 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
3
Power Outlet Fuses
1 — F103 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin & Power Outlet Console Rear
2 — F102 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel & Power
Outlet Left Rear Cargo Area
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a 115 Volt AC (150
Watt maximum) power outlet located on the back of the
center console. This outlet can power mobile phones,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
electronics and other low power devices requiring power
up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as
Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as
will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power
outlet will shut down if the 115 Volt AC (150 Watt
maximum) power rating is exceeded.
Power Inverter
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch™ 4.3
To turn the power inverter on or off perform the following:
1. Press the “More” hard-key (located next to the
Uconnect Touch™ display).
2. Press the “Outlet” soft-key (located on the Uconnect
Touch™ display) to turn the power inverter On or Off.
Vehicles Equipped With Uconnect Touch™ 8.4 and
8.4 Nav
Power Inverter Operation
To enable or disable the power inverter perform the
The power inverter is turned on and off using the following:
Uconnect Touch™ System.
1. Press the “Controls” soft-key.
2. Press the “Outlet” soft-key to turn the power inverter
On or Off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
For passengers in the second row there are two cupholdCUPHOLDERS
There are two cupholders, located in the center floor ers, located in the center armrest between the two seats.
console, for the front passengers.
When the armrest is folded flat the cupholders are in the
back of the Head Restraint. The Head Restraint can be
adjusted to better position the cupholders.
Floor Console Cupholders
Armrest Cupholders
3
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For vehicles equipped with third row seating, there are
additional cupholders located in the trim panels.
WARNING!
In addition to cupholders, vehicles may also be equipped
with bottle holders. The bottle holders are located on the
door trim panels.
If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle
holder, they can spill when the door is closed, burning the occupants. Be careful when closing the doors
to avoid injury.
Door Bottle Holder
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
STORAGE
Glovebox Storage
The glovebox storage compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel. Pull on the
release handle to open the glovebox storage compartment.
Floor Console Storage
An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the floor
console.
3
Floor Console Cubby Bin
Glovebox Storage Compartment
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of
Center Console Storage
There is a storage compartment located under the center the lid, to open the storage compartment.
console armrest.
Opened Storage Compartment
Center Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Sliding Armrest
The center console armrest can also be slid rearward for
easy access to the storage area.
Sliding Armrest
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Flip ’n Stow™ Front Passenger Seat Storage — If
Equipped
The seat latch release-loop is located in the center of the
seat cushion between the seat cushion and the seatback.
Pull the loop upward to release the latch and then
forward to open the seat to the detent position.
NOTE: Make sure that objects inside the bin do not
interfere with the latch before closing the seat. Push the
seat cushion downward after closing it to make sure it
latches to the base.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seat cushion is locked securely
into position before using the seat. Otherwise, the
seat will not provide the proper stability for passengers. An improperly latched seat cushion could cause
serious injury.
Second-Row Passenger Seat Temporary Storage
Bin
This is a temporary storage bin designed for use when
the seatback/armrest is down. Be sure to remove all
items from this bin before raising the seatback/armrest.
Front Passenger Seat Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
Second-Row Map Pocket And Grocery Retainers
In-Floor Storage Bin With Removable Liner
— If Equipped
NOTE: Position the front seat to at least a mid-track
A map storage pocket and grocery retainers are located
position to provide easier access to the storage bin.
on the back of the drivers seatback.
An in-floor storage bin is located behind each front seat.
Each 1.6 gal (5.9 l) bin can hold up to 12, 12 oz (0.35 l)
cans, plus ice, or other items. The removable bin liner
allows for easy filling, emptying, and cleaning.
Seat Storage And Grocery Retainers
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To access the bin, position the floor mat aside (if The liner can be removed for easy cleaning by lifting on
equipped). Pull the door latch release-loop upward to the notches as shown.
release the latch and then forward to open the bin door.
Removable Liner
In-Floor Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight — If Equipped
The rechargeable LED flashlight stores in its charging
station in the left rear quarter trim panel. To remove it,
press on the indent on the side of the flashlight and
release.
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
3
Three-Press Switch
NOTE: Be sure to return the flashlight to its charging
station when not in use to ensure it is ready for operation
the next time you need it.
Rechargeable Flashlight
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Management System
Seven Passenger System Features
• A large built-in storage bin with a hinged hardcover
located in the floor behind the third-row passenger
A raised load floor that sits on top of a large built-in
seats.
storage bin.
• 60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat
A tri-fold door built into the load floor that allows easy
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
access to items in the built-in storage bin.
to “Seats” in “Understanding The Features of Your
60/40 split second-row passenger seats with fold flat
Vehicle” for further information.
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
• 50/50 split third-row passenger seats with fold flat
to “Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
feature, which allows for extended cargo space. Refer
Vehicle” for further information.
to “Seats” in “Understanding The Features of Your
An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature,
Vehicle” for further information.
which extends cargo space even further. Refer to
• An optional front passenger seat with fold flat feature,
“Seats” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vewhich extends cargo space even further. Refer to
hicle” for further information.
“Seats” in “Understanding The Features of Your VeCargo tie-downs.
hicle” for further information.
Five Passenger System Features
•
•
•
•
•
• A retractable cargo area cover (if equipped).
• Cargo tie-downs.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
Cargo Tie-Downs
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a child seat
tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision, a tie-down
could pull loose and allow the child seat to come
loose. A child could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
Cargo tie-downs are located on both rear trim panels.
These tie-downs should be used to secure loads safely
when the vehicle is moving.
3
Cargo Tie-Downs
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
• Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits described on the label attached to the left door or left Retractable Cargo Area Cover (If Equipped) — Five
Passenger Models
door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible. secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight The removable retractable cargo area cover mounts in the
over or behind the rear axle can cause the vehicle to cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.
sway.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
The cover, when extended, covers the cargo area to keep
items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near the
liftgate opening secure the extended cover in place.
The cover rolls away neatly inside its housing when not
in use. You can also remove the cover from the vehicle to
make more room in the cargo area.
3
To install the cover, position it in the vehicle so that the
flat side of the housing faces upward. Then, insert either
the left or the right spring-loaded post (located on the
ends of the cover housing) into the left attachment point
or the right attachment point (shown).
Installing Retractable Cargo Area Cover
Insert the spring-loaded post on the opposite end of the
cover housing into the attachment point on the opposite
side of the vehicle.
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Grab the cover handle and pull it toward you. As the
cover nears the liftgate opening, guide the rear attachment posts (on both ends of the cover) into the notches in
the trim panels. Lower the cover to position the posts into
the bottom of the notches and release the handle.
WARNING!
A cargo cover that is unsecured in the vehicle could
cause injury in a collision. It could become airborne
during a sudden stop and strike someone inside the
vehicle. Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo
floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the
cover from the vehicle when taken from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear window wiper/washer control is located on the
left side of the steering column.
Positioning Retractable Cargo Area Cover
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
Rotate the switch upward past the first detent
position to activate the rear washer. The washer
pump will continue to operate as long as the switch
is held. Upon release, the wiper will cycle three times
before returning to the set position.
3
Rear Wiper/Washer
Rotate the switch upward to the first detent position for rear wiper operation.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
to the LOCK position, the wiper will automatically return
to the “Park” position. When the vehicle is restarted, the
wiper will resume function at whichever position the
switch is set at.
CAUTION!
• Turn the rear wiper off when driving through an
automatic car wash. Damage to the rear wiper may
result if the rear wiper switch is left in the on
position.
• In cold weather, always turn off the rear wiper
switch and allow the rear wiper to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If the
rear wiper switch is left on and the rear wiper
freezes to the window, damage to the rear wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the rear wiper blade from returning to the park
position. If the rear wiper control is turned off and
the blade cannot return to the park position, damage to the rear wiper motor may occur.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control panel. Press this button to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The roof rack cross rails and side rails are designed to
carry cargo weight. The load must not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg), and it should be distributed uniformly over the
cross rails. In addition, the roof rack does not increase the
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the
total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the roof
rack does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
NOTE: Metal crossbars are offered by MOPAR accessories. See your authorized dealer.
3
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Relocate the cross rails, aligning the cross rail stanchions (end pieces) with one of the vertical marks on the
1. Loosen the knobs on top of each cross rail approxioutboard surface of the side rail for proper positioning.
mately six turns to disengage the clamp tooth from the
There are four frontward marks for the front cross rail
side rail.
and four rearward marks for the rear cross rail. Make
sure the cross rails remain equally spaced or parallel at
any position for proper function.
To Move The Cross Rails
Roof Luggage Rack
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
3. Tighten the knobs on each cross rail to lock it in
position. As you tighten the knob, make sure the clamp
tooth engages completely into the side rail slot.
4. Attempt to move the cross rail to ensure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise when installing the cross
rails, make sure the arrows marked on the underside
of the cross rails face the front of the vehicle.
• To help reduce the amount of wind noise when the
cross rails are not in use, fasten the front cross rail in
the fourth position from the front and the rear cross
rail in the eighth position.
The tie down holes on the cross rail ends should always
be used to tie down the load. Check the straps frequently
to be sure that the load remains securely attached.
CAUTION!
• Cross rails should remain equally spaced or parallel at any luggage rack position for proper function. Noncompliance could result in damage to the
roof rack, cargo, and vehicle.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lbs (68 kg). Always distribute loads as evenly
as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield,
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with
large frontal area should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
• Place a blanket or other protection between the
surface of the roof and the load.
(Continued)
3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or heavy loads on the
roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or
nearby truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to
loads. This is especially true on large flat loads
and may result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the Roof
Rack Cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
▫ Oil Change Due . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
䡵 Instrument Cluster
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . 283
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ Tire Psi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
▫ EVIC White Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
▫ Vehicle Info
(Customer Information Features) . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ EVIC Amber Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ EVIC Red Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Turn Menu Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
4
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Uconnect Touch™ Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect Touch™ 4.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 296
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect Touch™ System 8.4 Settings . . . . . . 308
䡵 Uconnect™ Multimedia Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Single Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2
While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 . . . . 324
▫ Important Notes For Single Video Screen
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Play A DVD Using The
Touch-Screen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
▫ Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
▫ Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries . . . . 330
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries . . . . . . . 331
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
▫ Unwired威 Stereo Headphone Lifetime
Limited Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped . . . . . 343
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
䡵 Steering Wheel Audio Controls —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
▫ Right-Hand Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media
(i.e., CD) Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
䡵 Radio Operation And Mobile Phones
. . . . . . . 346
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . 355
▫ Rear Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
▫ Rear Blower Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
▫ Rear Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
▫ Rear Mode Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Side Window Demist Outlet
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Uconnect Touch™ System
— Glove Compartment
6 — Switch Bank
7 — Uconnect Touch™ Hard Controls
8 — SD Memory Card Slot
9 — Power Outlet
10 — CD/DVD Slot
11 — Engine Start/Stop Button
12 — Hood Release Lever
13 — Dimmer Controls
14 — Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
1. Tachometer
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
monitors engine and automatic transmission conengine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
range. Before reaching the red area, ease up on the
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
accelerator.
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
2. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
not require towing.
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
4. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in
the ESC system. If this light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
4
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
8. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
5. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal Display / Odometer Display
when the turn signal lever is operated.
Odometer Display
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle is driven The odometer display shows the total distance the vemore than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on, a hicle has been driven.
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
for a defective outside light bulb.
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
6. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam head- technician should leave the odometer reading the same
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forward as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
7. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
lights are on.
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
9. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumilights or headlights are turned on.
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
10. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
should be checked monthly when cold and the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
11. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver or front passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving,
if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
12. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
4
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesdetected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
sary.
inspected by an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
13. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
16. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
until the vehicle is disarmed.
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
18. Temperature Gauge
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera14. Speedometer
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
Indicates vehicle speed.
15. Fuel Door Reminder
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
vehicle.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealership for service.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pressing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
• Radio Info
• Fuel Economy
• Vehicle Speed
• Trip Info
• Tire Pressure
• Vehicle Information
• Warning Message Displays
• Turn Menu OFF
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select information by UP Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP button to scroll upwheel:
ward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Units)
and sub-menus.
DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and submenus.
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus or sub-menus. Press and hold
the SELECT button for two seconds to reset
features.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warnBACK Button
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
previous menu or sub-menu.
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
message takes control of the main display area for five
Displays
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
The EVIC display consists of three sections:
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
1. The top line where compass direction, odometer line condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long
and outside temperature are displayed.
as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up
EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
messages are displayed.
message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙
3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom- and ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙.
eter line.
• Unstored Messages
The main display area will normally display the main This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle). the following messages:
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙.
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
• Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
• Remote start aborted — Fuel low
• Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
• Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of • Remote start active — Push Start Button
message takes control of the main display area for five
• Vehicle Not in Park
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Examples of this message type are ⬙Memory System Un- • Key Left Vehicle
available - Not in Park⬙ and ⬙Automatic High Beams On⬙.
• Key Not Detected
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
• Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
• Service Keyless System
middle, and red telltales on the left.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if • Channel # Transmit
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile [1.6 km] with
• Channel # Training
either turn signal on)
• Channel # Trained
• Lamp Out (with vehicle graphic showing which of the
• Clearing Channels
4 turn signals is/are out).
• Key Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Channels Cleared
• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more doors open, • Did Not Train
with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/
• Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in “Starting
h])
And Operating”)
• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
• Oil Change Due (with a single chime)
• Low Tire Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
EVIC White Indicators
information on “Tire Pressure” and “Tire Pressure
This area will show reconfigurable white caution tellMonitor” in “Starting And Operating”.
tales. These telltales include:
• Service TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
• Shift Lever Status
information on “Tire Pressure Monitor” in “Starting
The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,L,5,4,3,2,1” are displayed
And Operating”.
indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1”
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
indicate the Autostick™ feature has been engaged and EVIC Amber Indicators
the gear selected is displayed. For further information on This area will show reconfigurable amber caution telltales. These telltales include:
Autostick™, refer to “Starting And Operating.”
• Electronic Speed Control ON
• Low Fuel Light
This light will turn on when the electronic
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
speed control is ON. For further information,
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Underfuel is added.
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
EVIC Red Indicators
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
This light will turn on when the electronic telltales include:
speed control is SET. For further information,
• Door Ajar
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “UnderThis light will turn on to indicate that one or
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
more doors may be ajar.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a
single chime.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
• Liftgate Ajar
This indicator will turn when the liftgate is ajar.
NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a
single chime.
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
sound for four minutes when this light turns on.
This light informs you of a problem with the
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
light will come on when the ignition is first
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a
• Charging System Light
bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
This light shows the status of the electrical charg- have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
ing system. The light should come on when the
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
ignition switch is first turned ON/RUN and remain on
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off. stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the veIf the light remains lit with the engine running, your
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an authonormal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may • Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
require towing.
temperature is running hot. This may occur
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
This light warns of an overheated engine condilight turns on, safely pull over and stop the
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge apvehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
to cool.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform
the following procedure:
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the ON/
RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
Oil Change Due
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
within 10 seconds.
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE Average Fuel Economy
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. When
the fuel economy is reset, the display will read “RESET” or
OFF/LOCK position.
show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history informaNOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
tion will be erased, and the averaging will continue from
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
the last fuel average reading before the reset.
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Fuel Economy
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel
Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press
the SELECT button. The following Fuel Economy functions will display in the EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
• Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
Fuel Economy
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.
Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
This display shows the instantaneous MPG in bar graph
form while driving. This will monitor the gas mileage in
real-time as you drive and can be used to modify driving
habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Vehicle Speed
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press the
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of SELECT button to display the current speed in mph or
km/h. Pressing the SELECT button a second time will
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
toggle the unit of measure between mph or km/h.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant EVIC.
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
Trip Info
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Trip
Info” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
SELECT button. Pressing the SELECT button with ⬙Trip
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Info⬙ highlighted will cause the EVIC display to show
Trip A, Trip B, and Elapsed Time all in one display. If you
want to reset one of the three functions you use the UP or
DOWN buttons to highlight (select) the feature that you
want to reset. Pressing the SELECT button will cause the
selected feature to reset individually. The three features
can only be reset individually. The following Trip functions display in the EVIC:
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
• Trip A
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the SELECT button once to
clear the resettable function.
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
Tire PSI
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informaPress and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire
tion:
PSI:” displays highlighted in the EVIC. Press the SELECT
Trip A
button to view a graphic of the vehicle with a tire
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last pressure value at each corner of the graphic.
reset.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
available information displays.
• Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Trans Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
• Engine Hours
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Messages
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Messages: XX” displays highlighted in the EVIC. If there is
more than one message, pressing the SELECT button will
display a stored warning message. Press and release the
UP and DOWN buttons if there is more than one message
to step through the remaining stored messages. If there
are no message, pressing the SELECT button will do
nothing.
Turn Menu OFF
Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button. Pressing the SELECT button blanks the menu display. Pressing
any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the
menu back.
Uconnect Touch™ SETTINGS
The Uconnect Touch™ system uses a combination of soft
and hard keys located on the center of the instrument
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
panel that allows you to access and change the customer & Locks, Heated Seats, Engine Off Operation, Compass
Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup
programmable features.
through hard-keys and soft-keys.
Hard-Keys
Hard-Keys are located on the left and right side of the NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
Uconnect Touch™ 4.3 screen. In addition, there is a time.
Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right side of the
Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel.
Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Soft-Keys
Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch™ display.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
Touch™ 4.3 Settings
In this mode the Uconnect Touch™ system allows you to
access programmable features that may be equipped
such as Display, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors
1 — Uconnect Touch™ 4.3 Settings Hard-Key
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Press the ⬙Settings⬙ hard-key to access the Settings screen,
use the Page Up/Down soft-keys to scroll through the
following settings. Touch the desired setting soft key to
change the setting using the description shown on the
following pages for each setting
Display
• Brightness
Touch the Brightness soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may select display brightness
with the headlights on and the headlights off. Adjust the
brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys or by
selecting any point on the scale between the + and –
soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Mode
Touch the Mode soft-key to change this display. When in
this display, you may select one of the auto display
settings. To change Mode status press and release the
Day, Night or Auto soft-key, then by touch the arrow back
soft-key.
Uconnect Touch™ 4.3 Soft-Keys
• Language
Touch the Language soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may select one of three
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
the English, French (Français) or Spanish (Español) softkey to select the language preferred. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information
will display in the selected language.
• Units
Touch the Units soft-key to change this display. When in
this display, you may switch the EVIC, odometer, and
navigation system (if equipped) between US and Metric
units of measure. Touch US or Metric then touch the
arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information
will display in the selected units of measure.
• Touch Screen Beep
Touch the Touch Screen Beep soft-key to turn on or shut
off the sound heard when a touch screen button (softkey) is pressed. To change the Touch Screen Beep setting
press and release the ON or OFF soft-key, then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
Clock
• Set Time
Touch the Set Time soft-key to change this display. When
in this display, you may select the time display settings.
To make your selection, touch the Set Time soft-key,
adjust the hours and minutes using the up and down
• Voice Response
soft-keys, select AM or PM, select 12 hr or 24 hr. Then
Touch the Voice Response soft-key to change the Voice touch the arrow back soft-key when all selections are
Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response complete.
Length, press and release the Brief or Long soft-key. Then
• Show Time Status
touch the arrow back soft-key.
Touch the Show Time Status soft-key to change this
display. When in this display, you may turn on or shut off
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
the digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Display soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Time Status setting, press and release the ON or OFF Refer to “ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function
soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
and operating information.
• Sync Time
Touch the Sync Time soft-key to change this display. • Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
When in this display, you may have the radio set the time Touch the Hill Start Assist soft-key to change this display.
automatically. To change the Sync Time setting, press and When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
release the ON or OFF soft-key. Then touch the arrow system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
back soft-key.
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
Safety / Assistance
the Hill Start Assist soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then
• Park Assist
touch the arrow back soft-key.
Touch the Park Assist soft-key to change this display. The
Lights
Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE • Illuminated Approach
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). The Touch the Illuminated Approach soft-key to change this
system can be enabled with Sound Only, Sound and display. When this feature is selected, the headlights will
Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park Assist status, activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
press and release the OFF, Sound Only or Sounds and the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
(RKE) transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach Beams soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the
status, touch the 0, 30, 60 or 90 soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If
Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
arrow back soft-key.
Vehicle” for further information.
• Headlights With Wipers
Touch the Headlights With Wipers soft-key to change this • Daytime Running Lights
display. When this feature is selected, and the headlight Touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key to change
switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make
on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are your selection, touch the Daytime Running Lights softturned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers soft- soft-key.
key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow back
• Steering Directed Lights
soft-key.
Touch the Steering Directed Lights soft-key to change this
• Auto High Beams
display. When this feature is selected, the headlights turn
Touch the Auto High Beams soft-key to change this relative to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To
display. When this feature is selected, the high beam make your selection, touch the Steering Directed Lights
headlights will deactivate automatically under certain soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow
conditions. To make your selection, touch the Auto High back soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
• Flash Headlights With Lock
Touch the Flash Headlights With Lock soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature
may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock
feature selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash
Headlights With Lock soft-key and select ON or OFF.
Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Flash Lights With Lock
Touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the front and rear
turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or
unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection, touch the Flash Lights With
Lock soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
Touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key to
change this display. When this feature is selected, the
• Auto Unlock On Exit
horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To
Touch the Auto Unlock On Exit soft-key to change this
make your selection, touch the Sound Horn With Remote
display. When this feature is selected, all doors will
Start soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the
unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission
arrow back soft-key.
is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s
door is opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto
Unlock On Exit soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
Doors & Locks
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Sounds Horn With Lock
Touch the Sounds Horn With Lock soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the horn will chirp
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,
touch the Sounds Horn With Lock soft-key and select ON
or OFF. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Remote Door Unlock Order
Touch the Remote Door Unlock Order soft-key to change
this display. When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press
is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
UNLOCK button. When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st
Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of the
doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to
Unlock All Doors On 1st Press, all doors will unlock no
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
grasped. If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is
programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when
the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if
Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If Unlock Driver Door Only
On 1st Press is selected, once the driver door is opened,
the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to
unlock all the doors (or use the RKE transmitter).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
• Passive Entry (Keyless Enter-N-Go)
Touch the Passive Entry soft-key to change this display.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, touch the
Passive Entry soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch
the arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
Heated Seats
• Auto Heated Seats
Touch the Auto Heated Seats soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the driver’s heated
seat will automatically turn on when temperatures are
below 40° F (4.4° C). To make your selection, touch the
Auto Heated Seats soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
Engine Off Options
• Headlight Off Delay
Touch the Headlight Off Delay soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the driver can
choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or
90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the
Headlight Off Delay status, touch the 0, 30, 60 or 90
soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Engine Off Power Delay
Touch the Engine Off Power Delay soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status, touch the 0 seconds,
45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch
the arrow back soft-key.
Compass Settings
• Variance
Touch the Variance soft-key to change this display. Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North
and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences, the variance should be set for the zone where the
vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
Compass Variance Map
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Calibration
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also
calibrate the compass by touching the ON soft-key and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
Audio
• Equalizer
Touch the Equalizer soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as • Balance / Fade
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks, Touch the Balance / Fade soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may adjust the Balance and
etc.
Fade settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
• Speed Adjusted Volume
Touch the Speed Adjusted Volume soft-key to change this
display. This feature increases or decreases volume relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted
Volume, press the OFF, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
SIRIUS Setup
• Channel Skip
SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
• Surround Sound
channels you would like to skip. Then touch the arrow
Touch the Surround Sound soft-key to change this dis- back soft-key.
play. This feature provides simulated surround sound
• Subscription Info
mode. To make your selection, press the Surround Sound
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
soft-key and select ON or OFF. Then touch the arrow
limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with
back soft-key.
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services,
Phone / Bluetooth
it will be necessary to access the information on the
Subscription Information screen in order to re-subscribe.
• Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the SubPhone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer scription Information screen.
to the Uconnect Touch™ Supplement.
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect
Touch™ System 8.4 Settings
Touch the More soft-key, then touch the Settings soft-key
to display the menu setting screen. In this mode the
Uconnect Touch™ system allows you to access programmable features that may be equipped such as Display,
Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Uconnect Touch™ 8.4 Soft-Keys
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Operation,
Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS When making a selection, touch the soft-key to enter the
desired mode. Once in the desired mode touch and
Setup.
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
next to the setting, showing that setting has been setime.
lected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
Once the setting is complete touch the Back Arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the X
soft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Up or Down Arrow soft-keys on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
available settings.
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
Display
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back
will be available.
soft-key.
• Display Mode
When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
release the Day, Night or Auto soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of three
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
the Set Language soft-key and then touch the desired
language soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
language, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Units
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch US or
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
• Voice Response Length
your selection, touch the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re- Cluster soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
Length, touch the Brief or Detailed soft-key until a back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
• Fuel Saver Display In Cluster — If Equipped
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
The “ECO” message is located in the instrument cluster
to return to the previous menu.
display, this message can be turned on or off. To make
• Touchscreen Beep
your selection, touch the Fuel Saver Display soft-key,
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
sound heard when a touch screen button (soft-key) is that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
pressed. Touch the Touchscreen Beep soft-key until a soft-key to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Clock
• Set Time Minutes
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
will be available.
Sync with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust
• Sync Time With GPS
the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key
When in this display, you may automatically have the
to return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting touch
close out of the settings screen.
the Sync with GPS Time soft-key until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been • Time Format
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the When in this display, you may select the time format
display setting. Touch the Time Format soft-key until a
previous menu.
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting,
• Set Time Hours
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The Sync
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
with GPS Time soft-key must be unchecked. To make
your selection touch the + or - soft-keys to adjust the • Show Time In Status Bar
hours up or down. Touch the back arrow soft-key to When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
return to the previous menu or touch the X soft-key to digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting touch the Show Time in Status Bar soft-key
close out of the settings screen.
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that • ParkView威 Backup Camera
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
to return to the previous menu.
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
Safety / Assistance
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
After pressing the Safety / Assistance soft-key the foldisplayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
lowing settings will be available.
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
• Park Assist
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind disappear. The ParkView威 camera is located on the rear
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE- of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph selection, touch the ParkView威 Backup Camera soft-key,
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
Sound and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
Assist status, touch and release the OFF, Sound Only or to return to the previous menu.
Sounds and Display button. Then touch the arrow back
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist” in
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for syssystem is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
tem function and operating information.
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
Lights
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings
your selection, touch the Headlights With Wipers softwill be available.
key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
• Headlight Illumination On Approach
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate soft-key to return to the previous menu.
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
touch the + or - soft-key to select your desired time
make your selection, touch the Auto High Beams softinterval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
previous menu.
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer to “Lights/
SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
the Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Daytime Running Lights
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
touch the Daytime Running Lights soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Steering Directed Lights
When this feature is selected, the headlights turn relative
to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To make
your selection, touch the Steering Directed Lights softkey, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, touch the Flash Headlights with Lock soft-key, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following
settings will be available.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock
• Flash Headlights With Lock
On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
• Flash Headlight With Lock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,
touch the Flash Lights With Lock soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
the previous menu.
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, you must
press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to
unlock the passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors
On 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the
first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed to Unlock All
the previous menu.
Doors 1st Press, all doors will unlock no matter which
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If Driver
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when Door 1st Press is programmed, only the driver’s door will
the remote start is activated. To make your selection, unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Entry, if Driver Door 1st Press is programmed touching
the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s
door opening. If driver door first is selected, once the
driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock
switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use RKE
transmitter).
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-NGo” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat With Vehicle
Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat will
automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F
(4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the
driver vented seat will turn on. To make your selection,
touch the Auto Heated Seats soft-key, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the fol- desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
lowing settings will be available.
• Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect™ phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds,
45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch
the arrow back soft-key.
Compass Settings
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
• Headlight Off Delay
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Variance Map
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
• Perform Compass Calibration
Touch the Calibration soft-key to change this setting. This
compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the need to
manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is new, the
compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will display
CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may also
calibrate the compass by pressing the ON soft-key and
completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
• Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting
soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale between
the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
Audio
touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the arrow
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings
back soft-key.
will be available.
• Music Info Cleanup
• Balance/Fade
This feature helps organize music files for optimized
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
music navigation. To make your selection, touch the
Fade settings.
Music Info Cleanup soft-key, select On or Off followed by
pressing the arrow back soft-key.
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone/Bluetooth
• Subscription Information
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth soft-key the follow- New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
ing settings will be available.
limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services,
• Paired Devices
it will be necessary to access the information on the
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Subscription Information screen in order to re-subscribe.
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect Touch™ Supplement.
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Subscription Information screen.
SIRIUS Setup
After pressing the SIRIUS Setup soft-key the following Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
settings will be available.
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
• Channel Skip
SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of NOTE: SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription.
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, touch the Channel Skip soft-key, select the
channels you would like to skip followed by pressing the
arrow back soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
UCONNECT™ MULTIMEDIA VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IF EQUIPPED
Getting Started
• Screen located in the overhead console : Unfold the
overhead LCD screen by pushing the button on the
overhead console behind the screen.
• With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position,
turn the radio on by pushing the ON/OFF Volume
Control knob.
• When the Video Screen are open and a DVD is inserted
into the radio, the screen turns on automatically, the
headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins.
Single Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES)™.
• The Remote Control
• The Touch-Screen Radio (If Equipped)
Overhead Video Screen
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Play A DVD
1. Press the EJECT button on the radio faceplate (TouchScreen).
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts
playing the first track.
3. Ensure the VES™ Remote Control and the Headphone
switch is on Channel 1.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen
NOTE:
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight DISC by • The VES™ system will retain the last setting when
turned off.
either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER
on the Remote Control.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
• Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
• Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play,
Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper
corner will turn off the remote control screen
functions.
Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks)
on the rear of the center console enable
the monitor to display video directly
from a video camera, connect video
games for display on the screen, or play
music directly from an MP3 player.
1. Video in (yellow)
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Right audio in (red)
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES™
jacks:
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
input jacks located on the back of the center console.
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter section
in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more information.
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Channel 1.
Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Using The Remote Control
Channel 2.
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
Using The Remote Control
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and
1, by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
on the Remote Control.
bottom of the screen.
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight the
desired audio source or repeatedly press the MODE
2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display
button on the remote until the desired audio source
the Rear Entertainment Controls.
appears on the screen.
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, touch the
“Power” soft-key.
4. Touch the “1” or “2” Source soft-key for the channel
desired and touch the “AUX” soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.
• When selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
will display on the screen and the audio could be
heard on Channel 1 in the headphones.
2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even
the Rear Entertainment Controls.
when the Video Screen is closed
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, touch the
Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio
“Power” soft-key.
1. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
4. Touch the “2” Source soft-key and select the desired
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
source.
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts
Important Notes For Single Video Screen System playing the first track.
• VES™ is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio 2. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passensimultaneously.
gers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch
is on Channel 1.
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1
and right side equates to Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. While looking at Screen 1, highlight DISC by either 4. Touch the “1” or “2” Source soft-key based on the
pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly channel you want to change and touch the “Disc” softkey. To exit touch the “X” at the top right of the screen.
pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER.
NOTE:
NOTE:
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown • Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
on the left side of the screen.
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmison the right side of the screen.
sion. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
brake must be engaged.
• Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a
DVD is playing full screen brings up basic control
2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display
functions for DVD play such as DVD Menu, Seek
the Rear Entertainment Controls.
Up/Down, Navigating through the menus, Exit. The
3. If the Rear Entertainment is turned off, touch the
basic control functions screen will time out and disap“Power” soft-key.
pear from the screen.
1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel button
is illuminated momentarily.
Remote Control
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after five
seconds.
Remote Control
Controls And Indicators
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control. When
the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel
1 (right side of the screen). When the selector switch is in
the Channel 2, position the remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel 2 (left side of the screen).
5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast forward
transmitter on or off. To hear audio while the screen is through the current audio track or video chapter. In
closed, press the Power button to turn the headphone menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
transmitter on.
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the 12. SLOW – Press to slow playback of a DVD disc. Press
previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to the play (䉴) to resume normal play.
start of the current or previous audio track or video
13. STATUS – Press to display the current status.
chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the menu.
14. MODE – Press to change the mode of the selected
7. MENU – Press to return to the main menu of a DVD
channel. See the Mode Selection section of this manual
disc, to select a satellite audio from the Station list, or
for details on changing modes.
select playback modes (RANDOM for a CD).
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
button to access the display settings (see the display
settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select the
9. 䡲 (Stop) – Stops disc play
menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded in the
10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio mode,
DVD player (if equipped) and the VES™ mode is selected
pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and pressing
and the disc is stopped, press the SETUP button to access
PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in the
the DVD Setup menu.
radio.
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to
11. MUTE – Press to mute the headphone audio output
return to the previous screen. When navigating a DVDs
for the selected channel.
disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s contents.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, press to seek to the previous
tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast
rewind through the current audio track or video chapter.
In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the
two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back
up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back
into position.
18. ENTER – Press to select the highlighted option in a
menu.
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the
next station. In disc modes, press to advance to the next
audio track or video chapter. In menu modes, use to
navigate in the menu.
Remote Control Storage
The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compartment for the remote control which is accessible when the
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not
try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very
difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its
4
The Remote Control Storage
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Locking The Remote Control
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for operation. To replace the batteries:
1. Touch the “MORE” soft-key.
• Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
2. Touch the “Rear Entertainment” soft-key to display
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
the Rear Entertainment Controls.
according to the polarity diagram shown.
3. Touch the “Lock-out” soft-key to lock the remote
control. Pressing the “Lock-out” soft-key a second time • Replace the battery compartment cover.
will unlock the remote control.
Headphones Operation
NOTE: Remote control lock-out will only apply to the The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
current ignition cycle. The VES™ will automatically using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
remove the lock-out if the ignition is cycled to “OFF”.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Replacing The Headphone Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation. To replace the batteries:
• Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
downward.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Volume Control
Power Button
Channel Selection Switch
Power Indicator
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MODE button will advance to the next mode. When the
mode is in an audio only source (such as FM), the Mode
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
Selection menu appears on screen.
switch is in the same position as the headphone selector
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
switch.
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate
NOTE:
to the available modes and press the ENTER button to
• When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
select the new mode.
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.
BACK button on the remote control.
• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned Unwired姞 Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
2. Press the MODE button on the remote control.
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wireas a DVD Video), pressing STATUS shows the status on a less headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferpopup banner at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the able.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
How Long Does The Coverage Last? This warranty lasts NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
as long as you own the Product.
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
What Will Unwired威 Do? Unwired威, at its option, will
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired威 remisuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replaceWARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
ment foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WAROR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTRANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEWARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PUNITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you have any questions or comments regarding your If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SAT) are in the shared
Unwired威 wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293- mode with the VES™, only the radio is able to control the
3332 or email [email protected] radio functions. In this case, VES™ can share the radio
mode, but not change stations until the radio mode is
You may register your Unwired威 wireless headphones
changed to a mode that is different from the VES™
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
selected radio mode. When shared, the radio has priority
1-888-293-3332.
for all radio modes (FM, AM). The VES™ has the ability
to switch tuner (AM/FM), SEEK, TUNE, and recall
System Information
presets in radio modes as long as it is not in shared mode.
Shared Modes
This allows the VES™ to output radio sources to the When in shared disc both the radio and the VES™ have
headphones and the radio to output VES™ sources to the control of the video functions. The VES™ has the ability
vehicle speakers. When the radio and VES™ channel 1 or to control the following video modes:
2 are in the same (shared) mode, a VES™ icon will be
• CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, and Track
visible on the radio’s display for that channel, and the
Up/Down.
shared icon will be visible on the VES™ screen. When in
shared mode, the same audio source is heard in the The VES™ can even control radio modes or video modes
while the radio is turned off. The VES™ can access the
shared headphone channel 1 or channel 2.
radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes
on the VES™ and activating a radio mode or disc mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Information Mode Display
1. Channel 1 Mode – Displays the current source for
Channel 1.
2. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: The audio
only icon is not used on Channel 1, in a single screen
system. Mute: when the Mute icon is displayed, the audio
for Channel 1 has been muted using the remote control’s
MUTE button.
Information Mode Video Screen Display
3. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute — Audio: Only in a
single screen system: The audio only icon is displayed on
Channel 2 when Channel 1 is in a video mode. Mute:
when the Mute icon is displayed, the audio for Channel
2 has been muted using the remote control’s MUTE
button.
When information mode is active, the current mode
setting for both audio channels is displayed. In addition 4. Channel 2 Mode — Displays the current source for
to the items called out by number, the remaining infor- Channel 2.
mation displays the current status of the source (such as
station frequency, name, preset or track num- ber, song
title, artist name, album name, etc.).
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Channel 2 ENTER Button Action — When the ENTER Numeric Keypad Menu
button on the remote control is pressed with the ⬙INPUT
FILE #⬙ button visible on the screen, the screen shows a
numeric entry keypad which allows you to enter a
specific track number on data discs and HDD (see
Numeric Keypad Menu section of this manual). Also,
Enter Button Action – “INPUT TRK #” to enter a specific
track number on audio discs.
6. Remote Locked Out — When the icon is displayed, the
remote control functions are disabled.
7. Clock — Displays the time.
8. Channel 1 Shared Status — When the icon is displayed, the audio for Channel 1 is also shared with the
radio and playing through the cabin speakers.
Numeric Keypad Menu
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2
shows DIRECT TUNE, pressing the remote control’s
ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu. This
screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency,
satellite channel, or track number. To enter the desired
digit:
Station List Menu
When listening to Satellite audio, pressing the remote
control’s MENU button displays a list of all available
channels. Navigate this list using the remote control’s
navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to find the desired station,
press the remote control’s ENTER button to tune to that
station. To jump through the list more quickly, navigate
1. Press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲,
to the Page Up and Page Down icons on the screen.
䉴, 䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
Disc Menu
2. When the digit is highlighted, press the remote conWhen listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing
trol’s ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat these steps
the remote control’s MENU button displays a list of all
until all digits are entered.
commands which control playback of the disc. Using the
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and options you can activate or cancel Random play.
press the remote control’s ENTER button.
Options Menu
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the “Options”
button and press the remote control’s ENTER button.
soft-key activates the Options Settings menu. From this
menu you can adjust Audio, Subtitles, Angle and Title.
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display Settings
on the screen. The factory default settings are already set
for optimum viewing, so there is no need to change these
settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then press the
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and press the remote control’s ENTER
button.
Video Screen Display Settings
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc • Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
in Play mode, Aux Video, etc.), pressing the remote
control’s SETUP button activates the Display Settings • Close the video screen.
menu. These settings control the appearance of the video
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
• To change the current audio mode, press the remote Disc Formats
control’s MODE button. This will automatically select The VES™ DVD player is capable of playing the followthe next available audio mode without using the Mode ing types of discs (12 mm or 8 mm diameter):
Select menu.
• DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
notes about DVD Region Codes)
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
• DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only)
display menu or media.
• Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is • CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio
format files
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press
• Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries DVD Region Codes
are installed in the headphones.
The VES™ DVD player and many DVD discs are coded
by geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the player, the
disc will not play and will be ejected.
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the VES™ DVD player may not be able to
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the VES™ DVD
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,
help avoid playback problems, use the following guidebut the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program
lines when recording discs.
material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If • Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
closed are playable.
you increase the volume level to account for this change
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CDthe disc or to another mode.
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
Recorded Discs
DVD Audio Support
The VES™ DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs • For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
supported.
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or re• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
corded) are not supported.
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA
files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or
⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
these extensions for any other types of files.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
playable in the VES™ DVD player, check with the disc
recording software publisher for more information about • For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
burning playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs • Any file that is copy protected (such as those downloaded from many online music stores) will not play.
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
The DVD player will automatically skip the file and
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
begin playing the next available file.
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
DVD player.
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
player will automatically skip the file and begin playThe DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
ing the next available file.
Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
• The DVD player always uses the file extension to
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also skipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end
supported. For both formats, the recommended of the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the
beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
first track.
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
DVD player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next file, or The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot
the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current or conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior temperaprevious file.
ture is above 120°F. When this occurs, the DVD player will
display ⬙VES High Temp⬙ and will shut off the VES™
• To change the current directory, use the remote condisplays until a safe temperature is reached. This shuttrol’s PROG Up and Down buttons.
down is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD player.
Disc Errors
Product Agreement
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙ This product incorporates copyright protection technolmessage is displayed on the VES™ and Radio displays. A ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellecdirty, damaged, or incompatible disc format are all tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
potential causes for a ⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherIf a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD
disassembly is prohibited.
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
Dolby威 Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙,
⬙MLP Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right reserved.
General Information
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation For further information, refer to the Uconnect Touch™
User’s Manual.
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. The left and right-hand
controls are rocker-type switches with a pushbutton in
the center of each switch. Reach behind the steering
wheel to access the switches.
Right-Hand Switch Functions
• Press the top of the switch to increase the volume.
• Press the bottom of the switch to decrease the volume.
• Press the button in the center of the switch to change
modes (i.e., AM, FM, etc.).
Left-Hand Switch Functions For Radio Operation
• Press the top of the switch to SEEK the next listenable
station up from the current setting.
• Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK the next
listenable station down from the current setting.
• Press the button in the center of the switch to tune to
the next preset that you have programmed.
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Left-Hand Switch Functions For Media (i.e., CD)
Operation
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
• Press the top of the switch once to listen to the next
track.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
• Press the bottom of the switch once either to listen to
the beginning of the current track or to listen to the 2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
beginning of the previous track if it is within one wiping from center to edge.
second after the current track begins to play.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch• Press the switch up or down twice to listen to the ing the disc.
second track, three times to listen to the third track,
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
and so forth.
or anti-static sprays.
• Press the button located in the center of the switch to
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
change to the next preset that you have programmed.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
General Overview
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the Automatic
Climate Controls on the instrument panel or through the
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in Uconnect Touch™ system display.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from When the Uconnect Touch™ system is in different modes
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and pasby relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is senger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does the display.
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Hard-Keys
Hard-keys are located on the left and right side of the
Uconnect Touch™ 4.3 screen in the center of the instrument panel. There are also hard-keys located below the
Uconnect Touch™ screen.
4
Automatic Temperature Controls — Hard-Keys
1 — Uconnect Touch™ System 4.3 Climate Hard-Key
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch™ system
screen.
Automatic Temperature Controls — Hard-Keys
Uconnect Touch™ System 4.3 Manual
Temperature Controls — Soft-Keys
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
If equipped with ATC, performing this function will
cause the automatic operation to switch into manual
mode and the AUTO indicator will turn off.
2. Recirculation Control Button
Press and release to change the current setting; the
indicator illuminates when ON.
Uconnect Touch™ System 8.4 Automatic
Temperature Controls — Soft-Keys
Button Descriptions
(Applies To Both Hard-keys And Soft-keys)
1. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning
(A/C) setting; the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
3. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation if
equipped with ATC. The speeds can be selected using
either hard-keys or soft-keys as follows:
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
position. Blower control should be left in the “ON” Soft-Key — Uconnect Touch™ System 8.4
position to allow the climate control to either warm or Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
cool the vehicle
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
Hard-Keys
area between the icons.
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower 4. Front Defrost Button
speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise. Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feaSoft-Key — Uconnect Touch™ System 4.3
ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
Press the blower soft-key to enter the blower setting
(if equipped) to switch into manual mode. The blower
screen. Once in the blower setting screen, use the UP and
speed may increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the
DOWN arrows to adjust the blower speed setting, or
front defrost mode is turned off, the climate system will
directly select the speed setting by pressing the blower
return the previous setting.
bar area around the blower icon. The blower speed
increases as you press the UP arrow or move clockwise 5. Rear Defrost Button
on the setting scale and decreases when you press the Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
DOWN arrow or move counter-clockwise on the setting defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
scale.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window 6. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically Provides the passenger with independent temperature
turns off after 10 minutes.
control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
8. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
9. AUTO Operation Button — If Equipped
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
12. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel.
10. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
Provides the driver with independent temperature condirect the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatiside-to-side to regulate airflow direction. There is a shut
cally adjust the passenger and rear temperature setting at
off wheel, located below the air vanes, to shut off or
the same time.
adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
11. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
• Bi-Level Mode
Provides the driver with independent temperature conAir comes from the instrument panel outlets and
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automati- through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
cally adjust the passenger and rear temperature setting at
the same time.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort 13. SYNC
conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger and
• Floor Mode
rear temperature setting with the driver temperature
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting
air is directed through the defrost and side window
while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
demister outlets.
NOTE: When SYNC is ON and the driver selects Mix or
• Mix Mode
Defrost Mode, Rear mode will be Floor.
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or 14. Temperature Control
(Manual Temperature Control Only)
snowy conditions.
Press the temperature soft-key to regulate the tempera• Defrost Mode
ture of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving
Air comes from the windshield and side window
the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmer
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue
temperature settings for best windshield and side winarea indicates cooler temperatures.
dow defrosting and defogging. When the Defrost mode is
selected, the blower level may increase.
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Climate Control Functions
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
recirculation
indicator will illuminate when this button is
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings.
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
NOTE:
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix or
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off.
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
mode is not allowed in Mix, Floor and Defrost modes to
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than be disabled automatically if these modes are selected.
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo- Attempting to use Recirculation while in these modes
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from turn off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
NOTE:
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
ATC Hard-keys are located in the center of the instru- • It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
ment panel.
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and blower speed to provide
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect Touch™ system
comfort as quickly as possible.
screen.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
Automatic Operation
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (9) on the
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect Touch™ System SetAutomatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
tings” in this section of the manual.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the system
to maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger temperature hard or soft control buttons (6, 7, 10, 11). Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system will achieve
and automatically maintain that comfort level.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation conthe greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to trol.
function automatically.
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear right
side of the 3rd Row seats and overhead outlets at each
outboard rear seating position. The system provides
heated air through the floor outlets or cool, dehumidified
air through the headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control is in the Uconnect
Touch™ system, located on the instrument panel.
Rear Climate Controls 4.3 Screen
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Blower Up Soft-Key
Mode Soft-Key
Temperature Soft-Key
Blower Down Soft-Key
5 — Done Soft-Key
6 — Rear Lock Soft-Key
7 — Rear Off Soft-Key
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Rear Lock
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock soft-key on the
Uconnect Touch™ screen, illuminates a lock symbol in
the rear display. The rear temperature and air source are
controlled from the front Uconnect Touch™ system.
Rear second row occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is turned
off.
Rear Climate Controls 8.4 Screen
1 — Rear Auto Soft-Key
2 — Rear Lock Soft-Key
3 — Front Climate Soft-Key
4 — Temperature Up Soft-Key
5— Temperature Down SoftKey
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Blower Up Soft-Key
Mode Soft-Key
Blower Down Soft-Key
Rear Off Soft-Key
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The rear ATC is located in the headliner, near the center • Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the
of the vehicle.
Uconnect Touch™ screen. This turns off the Rear
Temperature Lock icon in the rear temperature knob.
• Rotate the Rear Blower, Rear Temperature and the
Rear Mode Control knobs to suit your comfort needs.
• ATC is selected by adjusting the rear blower knob
counterclockwise to AUTO.
Rear ATC Control Features
1 - Blower Speed
2 - Rear Temperature
3 - Rear MODE
4 - Rear Temperature Lock
Once the desired temperature is displayed, the ATC
System will automatically achieve and maintain that
comfort level. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the settings. You will
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
NOTE: It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode and fan speed to
provide comfort as quickly as possible.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Rear Blower Control
The rear blower control knob can be manually set to off,
or any fixed blower speed, by rotating the knob from low
to high. This allows the rear seat occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic Temperature
Control System through an intake grille, located in
the right side trim panel behind the third row seats.
The rear outlets are located in the right side trim
panel of the 3rd Row seat. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload causing
damage to the blower motor.
Rear Temperature Control
To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
rotate the temperature knob counterclockwise to decrease the temperature, and clockwise to increase the
temperature. The rear temperature settings are displayed
in the Uconnect Touch™ system.
When rear controls are locked by the Uconnect Touch™
system, the Rear Temperature Lock symbol on the temperature knob is illuminated and any rear overhead
adjustments are ignored.
Rear Mode Control
Auto Mode
The rear system automatically maintains the correct
mode and comfort level desired by the rear seat occupants.
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of
these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct
the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to one
side will shut off the airflow.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
Bi-Level Mode
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
floor outlets.
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head- glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Floor Mode
Winter Operation
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase the blower
speed. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement
instructions.
NOTE: Recirculation mode without A/C should not be
used for long periods, as fogging may occur.
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 374
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
▫ Four-Speed Automatic Transmission – 2.4L
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission – 3.6L
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
5
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 400
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 400
䡵 All Wheel Drive (AWD) — If Equipped . . . . . . 391
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 400
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . 404
䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . 405
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC Off Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
䡵 Tire Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 412
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . 413
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 414
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
䡵 Tires — General Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 429
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . 430
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . 422
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 423
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
▫ Premium System – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 435
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
5
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 440
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 448
䡵 Flexible Fuel (3.6L Engine Only) —
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . .
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . .
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . 445
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . .
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
. . . . . . 449
. . . . . . 449
. . . . . . 449
. . . . . . 449
. . . . . . 450
. . . . . . 450
. . . . . . 451
. . . . . . 451
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . 457
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, and do not leave the ignition in the in the
ACC or RUN position. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
Keyless Enter-N-Go
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in
the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
To start the engine, the transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button once. The system
takes over and attempts to start the vehicle. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
prior to the engine starting, press the button again.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain in
the ACC position until the shift lever is in PARK and the
button is pressed twice to the OFF position. If the shift
lever is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/STOP
button is pressed once, the EVIC (if equipped) will
display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the engine
will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the
PARK position, or it could roll.
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN • Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
PARK, the system will automatically time out after
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
30 minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
will display “ACC”),
OFF position.
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions – With
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
(EVIC will display “ON/RUN”),
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
and START. To change the ignition switch positions
will display “OFF”).
without starting the vehicle and use the accessories
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or ⫺29°C)
follow these steps.
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a
booster battery or the battery in another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine
(Using ENGINE START/STOP Button)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
CAUTION!
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
Damage to the transmission may occur if the followgrounded, three-wire extension cord.
ing precautions are not observed:
The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood • Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
between the headlight assembly and the Totally Intea complete stop.
grated Power Module (Fuse Box) on the driver’s side of • Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
the vehicle.
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUhour to have an adequate effect on the engine.
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
WARNING!
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal down
while shifting out of PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and turn the engine off. When the ignition is in the
OFF position, the shift lever is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in
or near the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition in
the in the ACC or RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK.
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK/
OFF position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Four-Speed Automatic Transmission – 2.4L
Engine
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You
must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of
the PARK position (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift
Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick威 shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick威 shift control
(refer to “AutoStick威” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information). Moving the shift lever to the left or
right (-/+) while in the AutoStick威 position (below the
Drive position) will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a cluster as 4, 3, 2, 1.
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
Shift Lever
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
Gear Ranges
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precauDO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever rearward (with the brake
pedal released) after you have placed it in PARK.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and turn the engine off. When the ignition is in the
OFF position, the shift lever is locked in the
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement. Furthermore, you should never leave
unattended children inside a vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in
or near the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition in
the in the ACC or RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with engine running. The engine may be started
in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the transThe following indicators should be used to ensure that mission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and
“Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick威 mode
(refer to “AutoStick威” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information) to select a lower gear range. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the transmission operating temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the powertrain controller will
modify the transmission shift schedule and expand the
range of torque converter clutch engagement. This is
done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in second gear regardless of which forward gear is
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
to operate. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
be modified depending on engine and transmission
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damtemperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature imaging the transmission.
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter following steps:
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold tempera1. Stop the vehicle.
tures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to second gear only. Normal operation will re- 2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
sume once the transmission temperature has risen to a
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
suitable level.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
5. Restart the engine.
• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate temperature,
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal • the engine coolant has reached an adequate temperature, and
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is
recommended that you visit an authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatiIf the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
service is required.
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
Overdrive Operation
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fourth gear). The transmission will NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the follow- until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
ing conditions are present:
[usually after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving].
Because the engine speed is higher when the torque
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold.
This is normal. Using the AutoStick威 feature, when the
transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that
the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission – 3.6L Engine
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You
must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of
the PARK position (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift
Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick威 shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick威 shift control
(refer to “AutoStick威” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information). Moving the shift lever to the left or
right (-/+) while in the AutoStick威 position (below the
Drive position) will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
Shift Lever
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
Gear Ranges
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precauDO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever rearward (with the brake
pedal released) after you have placed it in PARK.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and turn the engine off. When the ignition is in the
OFF position, the shift lever is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
Furthermore, you should never leave unattended
children inside a vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in
or near the vehicle, and do not leave the ignition in
the in the ACC or RUN position. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when vehicle is standing for prolonged
The following indicators should be used to ensure that periods with engine running. The engine may be started
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position: in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the trans• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever mission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and
“Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
third, and fourth gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive
sixth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick威 mode
(refer to “AutoStick威” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information) to select a lower gear range. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to third gear only. Normal operation will resume
once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to
an authorized dealer for service without damaging the
transmission.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, it is
recommended that you visit an authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automatiIf the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
service is required.
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
Overdrive Operation
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the follow- until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
ing conditions are present:
[usually after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving].
Because the engine speed is higher when the torque
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem- transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold.
perature,
This is normal. Using the AutoStick威 feature, when the
transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that
• the engine coolant has reached an adequate temperathe transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
ture, and
5
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive feature providing
manual shift control, giving you more control of the
vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
NOTE: In AutoStick威 mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to
the right (+) or left (-), except as noted below. AutoStick威
is deactivated when the shift lever is moved out of the
AutoStick威 (+/-) position.
General Information
• You can launch the vehicle from a stop in any gear
except top gear. The system will ignore attempts to
upshift into top gear at too low of a vehicle speed.
Operation
When the shift lever is in the AutoStick威 position (below • If a ratio other than first is selected, and the vehicle is
the DRIVE position), it can be moved from side to side.
brought to a stop, the transmission control logic will
This allows the driver to manually select the transmission
automatically select the first gear ratio.
gear being used. Moving the shift lever to the left (-)
• Starting out in second gear is helpful in snow or icy
triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift. The
conditions. To select second gear after the vehicle is
gear position will display in the instrument cluster on the
brought to a stop, tap the shift lever to the right (+)
transmission range indicator.
once.
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick威 is en- ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) — IF EQUIPPED
This feature provides on-demand All-Wheel Drive
gaged.
(AWD). The system is automatic with no driver inputs or
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
additional driving skills required. Under normal driving
AutoStick威 is engaged.
conditions, the front wheels provide most of the traction.
• If a downshift would cause the engine to over-speed, If the front wheels begin to lose traction, power is shifted
that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine. automatically to the rear wheels. The greater the front
wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
• The transmission will automatically upshift when necrear wheels.
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy throttle
• Mostly the transmission will stay in the manually
input (where one may have no wheel spin), torque will be
selected ratio, however:
sent to the rear in a pre-emptive effort to improve vehicle
− If the system detects powertrain overheating, the launch and performance characteristics.
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
CAUTION!
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
− If the system detects a problem, it will disable the
AutoStick威 mode and the transmission will return to
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
All wheels must have the same size and type tires.
Unequal tire sizes must not be used. Unequal tire
size may cause failure of the power transfer unit.
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
5
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time. Power Steering Fluid Check
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
5
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the correct fluid
type.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
Parking Brake
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
cluster will illuminate.
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
5
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake
pedal or the shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in
the vehicle. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will
be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application and
greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In
addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the
hydraulic system, the “Brake Warning Light” will turn on
as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WARNING!
• Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining
wear, and possible brake damage. You would not
have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
• Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light”
on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance or vehicle stability during braking
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the
vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control. You could have a collision. Have the vehicle
checked immediately.
5
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up to help
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. Refer
to “Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)” under “Electronic
Brake Control System” in this section for more information.
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ABS
cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an
ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Traction Control System (TCS),
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC), and Trailer Sway Control (TSC). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
of the stop.
related motor noises. These noises are the system perThese are all normal characteristics of ABS.
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self check occurs each time the
WARNING!
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipABS is activated during braking under certain road or
ment that may be susceptible to interference
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can incaused by improperly installed or high output
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
debris, or panic stops.
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capaYou also may experience the following when the brake
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
system goes into Anti-lock:
performed by qualified professionals.
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a • Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
short time after the stop),
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
• Brake pedal pulsations, and
(Continued)
5
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
Anti-Lock Brake Light
The Anti-Lock Brake Light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON position and may stay on
for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the Brake System Warning Light is not on.
If the ABS Light is on, the brake system should be
serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of
Anti-Lock brakes. If the ABS Light does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
If both the Brake System Warning Light and the ABS
Light remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best
BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you
must apply continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
WARNING!
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BASequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS functions similar to a
limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
5
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for more information.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only reduce the
chance of wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers. It cannot prevent wheel lift due to
other factors, such as road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for over-steering and under-steering the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path.
• Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started the system will be in this mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons
as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional information.
The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
Partial Off
the condition of over-steer or under-steer.
The “ESC OFF” button is located in the switch bank
• Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
above the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off”
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
mode, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” button and the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily press the
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
“ESC OFF” button and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Indicator Light” will turn off. This will restore the normal OFF” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
“ESC On” mode of operation.
pressing the “ESC OFF” button. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
ESC OFF Button
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authowith snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the diagnosed and corrected.
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo- • The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
that caused the ESC activation.
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acElectronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
NOTE:
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” sively swaying trailer. TSC activates automatically once
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen- the excessively swaying trailer is recognized. When TSC
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
is functioning, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power will be reduced,
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
and you will feel the brake being applied to individual
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
wheels in an attempt to stop the trailer from swaying.
NOTE: The TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
the “Partial Off” mode.
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to ”Vehicle Loading” and “Trailer Towing” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
• If TSC activates while towing a trailer, stop the
vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in an
accident or serious personal injury.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa•
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
Loading
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuinflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas- NOTE:
• The following table shows examples on how to calcusengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs • For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
[295 kg]).
(392 kg).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result over-heating and in tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear Information” section of this manual.
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
consumption.
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial-Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle operaways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
combine them with other types of tires.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
WARNING!
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxiSpare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
Wheel – If Equipped
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
75 mph (120 km/h).
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
pattern.
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipthe Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempodriver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
80D18 103M.
with one of the following types of non-matching temporary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equiptire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
first opportunity.
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or icy conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
WARNING!
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years,
regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to follow
this warning can result in sudden tire failure. You
could lose control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS
Use only compact chains, or other traction aids that meet
SAE type “Class S” specifications. Chains must be the
proper size for the vehicle, as recommended by the chain
manufacturer.
NOTE: Do not use tire chains on a compact spare tire.
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Use chains on 215/65R16 tires only.
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious damage. Stop the
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
• Do not exceed 45 mph (70 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Install chains on the front wheels as tightly as
possible and then retighten after driving about
0.5 mile (0.8 km).
• Do not drive for prolonged periods of time on dry
pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed,
and conditions for use. Always use the lower
suggested operating speed of the chain manufacturer, if different from the speed recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if the
chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest
(Continued) different maximum speeds. This notice applies to all
chain traction devices, including link and cable (radial)
chains.
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states proSNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the checked before using these tire types.
M+S designation on the tire sidewall.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only different loads and perform different steering, driving,
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
safety and handling of your vehicle.
unequal rates.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven. This is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause
the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa),
but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still
be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light” will turn off only after the tires are inflated
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value.
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light.”
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW
the tire.
TIRE” message will be displayed and a chime will
Base System
sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
four active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
readings to the receiver module.
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure Monitire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly toring Telltale Light” and “LOW TIRE” message will turn
and to maintain the proper pressure.
off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
The TPMS consists of the following components:
receive this information.
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault
will also sound a chime. If the ignition switch is cycled,
this sequence will repeat, providing the system fault still
exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
turn off when the fault condition no longer exists. A
system fault can occur due to any of the following:
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, a chime will sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn on and a “LOW TIRE”
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
upon the next ignition switch cycle.
TPMS sensors.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
that affects radio wave signals.
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel remain on solid.
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on and to maintain the proper pressure.
solid.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
• Receiver module
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the “Tire Pres- • Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
sure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off, as long as no
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System messages,
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
Center (EVIC)
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System – If Equipped
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure more of the four active road tires. In addition, the
readings to the receiver module.
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minia graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with mum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not
the low tire pressure values flashing.
being received.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those flashing in If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
placard pressure value. Once the system receives the no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically Light” will no longer flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM
update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flash- SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
ing, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
will turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to can occur due to any of the following:
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
TPMS to receive this information.
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPMS
sensors.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for
that affects radio wave signals.
75 seconds and then remain on solid. The system fault
will also sound a chime. In addition, the EVIC will
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel NOTE:
housings.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS sensors.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain on and a
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the EVIC
message is then followed with a graphic display with will still display a flashing pressure value.
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
remain on solid. In addition, the EVIC will display a
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid,
and the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new pressure
value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MRXC4W4MA4
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2546A-C4W4MA4
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended,
as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
these engines.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experiThe manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will probefore considering service for the vehicle.
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
CAUTION!
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold driveability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
Problems that result from using gasoline containing E-85 perform the following:
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
• change the engine oil and oil filter
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
• disconnect and reconnect the battery
not be covered under warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
exposure to E-85 fuel.
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
MMT In Gasoline
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline fuel.
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without Fuel System Cautions
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
CAUTION!
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content performance:
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump, • The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perforthe gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
mance and damage the emissions control system.
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
(Continued)
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle
to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous
exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
5
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
E-85 Fuel Cap
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
E-85 Badge
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that
alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be
avoided.
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
• you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
than 1/4 full
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
refueling
Techron may be used.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
• you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
a period of at least 5 minutes
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formuObserving these precautions will avoid possible hard
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
during warm up.
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer requires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
NOTE:
• When the ambient temperature is above 90° F (32° C), requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
you may experience hard starting and rough idle contains additional requirements, developed during exfollowing start up even if the above recommendations tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
are followed.
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
CAUTION!
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap has been designed for use
with this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door reinforcement.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
• Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
word “gASCAP” will display in the odometer. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound
is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn
off the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
VEHICLE LOADING
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as • Type of Vehicle
indicated.
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Vehicle Certification Label
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
the rear of the driver’s door.
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
The label contains the following information:
GVWR.
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
it is not over the GVWR.
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables, and equipment (permanent or temTo maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve- ready for operation⬙ condition.
hicles used for trailer towing.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
Common Towing Definitions
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. and trailer when weighed in combination.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo, and tongue
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
allowance for the presence of a driver.
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases, it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control – Electronic
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System/Trailer Sway
Control (TSC)” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
Trailer Sway Control – Mechanical
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturers directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight distributing systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable recreational
vehicle
dealer
for
additional
information.
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
5
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Improper Adjustment of
Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer for
package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Heavy Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
2.4L/Automatic
6,000 lbs (2 722 kg)
22 sq ft (2.0 sq m)
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg)
32 sq ft (3.0 sq m)
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg)
32 sq ft (3.0 sq m)
7,300 lbs (3 311 kg)
32 sq ft (3.0 sq m)
3.6L/Automatic
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
1,000 lbs (454 kg)
which includes up to
5 persons & Luggage
2,500 lbs (1 134 kg)
which includes 1 to 2
persons & Luggage
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
which includes 3 to 4
persons & Luggage
1,500 lbs (680 kg)
which includes 5 to 7
persons & Luggage
Max. Tongue Wt.
100 lbs (45 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire information.
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or authorized dealer-installed
options must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information”
placard for the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
(Continued)
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic
load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the
driver to control. You could lose control of your
vehicle and have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance, or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and
allow enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always, block or ⴖchockⴖ
the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized. (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight.)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Towing Requirements – Tires
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
on replacement tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limits.
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper- − Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
− Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation prespersonal injury.
sures before trailer usage.
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
required when towing a trailer with electronically
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
proper inspection procedure.
brake controller is not required.
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for information
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes, and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in a collision.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
(Continued) NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
5
Seven-Pin Connector
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
the interval specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping, trailer towing.” Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from the proper maintenance intervals.
heavy traffic.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
Automatic Transmission
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, use − When using the speed control, if you experience speed
the Autostick威 feature to select a lower gear.
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
NOTE: Using a lower gear range while operating the
vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve − Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also AutoStick威 – If Equipped
provide better engine braking.
− By using the AutoStick威 modes and selecting a specific
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 mingear range, frequent shifting can be avoided. The
utes of continuous operation, then change the transmishighest gear range should be selected that allows for
sion fluid and automatic transmission filter according to
adequate performance. For example, choose “4” if the
desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if
needed to maintain the desired speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
− Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to
prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational towing is not allowed. DO NOT flat tow
this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain will result.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
Cooling System
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- ground.
heating, take the following actions:
− City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
▫ 2.4L Engine — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 䡵 Jump-Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
▫ Spare Tire Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
6
468 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
䡵 Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
▫ Front-Wheel Drive (Fwd) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
▫ With Keyless Enter-N-Go — If Equipped . . . 490
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
▫ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
▫ All-Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 469
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel switch bank, above the climate controls. potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional • On the highways — slow down.
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
to High. This allows the heater core to act as a
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
may wear down your battery.
from the engine cooling system.
6
470 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
safely pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the A/C turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains on the
“H,” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine OFF immediately, and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
2.4L Engine — If Equipped
On hot days the engine oil temperature may become too
hot during sustained high-speed driving or if towing a
trailer up long grades. If this happens, a HOTOIL message will flash in the odometer and the vehicle speed will
be reduced to 48 mph (77 km/h) maximum until the
engine oil temperature is reduced.
NOTE: The maximum vehicle speed is reduced to
48 mph (77 km/h), you may reduce vehicle speed further
as needed. Once the engine oil temperature is reduced,
you may continue to drive normally.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 471
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
(Continued)
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
6
472 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jack Location
Spare Tire Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed underneath a cover The spare tire is stowed underneath the rear of the
in the rear storage bin in the cargo area.
vehicle and is held in place by means of a cable winch
mechanism.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Jack Storage Location
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Set the parking brake.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 473
4. Place the shift lever in PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
1. Remove the jack-handle components 1, 2 and 3 from
storage and assemble them.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For example, if changing
the right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Spare Tire Removal
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
NOTE: On seven-passenger models, fold the third-row
passenger seats flat. This will provide more space when NOTE: Assemble components 2 and 3 by seating the
accessing the jacking tools and when operating the winch small ball at the end of component 2 in the small hole at
mechanism.
the end of component 3. This will lock these components
together. Assemble components 1 and 2 so that the wheel
6
474 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
nut socket at the end of component 1 faces upward when 4. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and
seated on component 2. This will make it easier to rotate remove it from the center of the wheel.
the assembly when operating the winch mechanism.
2. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive
nut located in the jack storage area. Rotate the jackhandle assembly counterclockwise until the spare tire is
on the ground with enough cable slack to allow you to
pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The winch mechanism is designed for use with the
jack-handle only. Use of an air wrench or other power
tools is not recommended and it can damage the
winch.
3. Pull the spare tire out from underneath the vehicle and
raise it upright so the tire’s tread is on the ground.
Spare Tire Retainer
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 475
Spare Tire Stowage
NOTE: Refer to “Spare Tire Removal” for information
on assembling the winch tools.
1. Place the spare tire near to the winch cable. Hold the
spare upright so that the tire’s tread is on the ground and
the valve stem is at the top of the wheel facing away from
the rear of the vehicle.
2. Tilt the retainer at the end of the winch cable and drop
it through the center of the wheel. Then place the spare
tire with the cable and retainer underneath the vehicle.
3. Fit the assembled jack-handle over the winch drive
nut. Rotate the jack-handle assembly clockwise to raise
the spare tire into the storage area. Continue to rotate the
jack-handle assembly until you hear the winch mechanism click three times. It cannot be over tightened. Push
against the tire several times to be sure it is held securely
in place.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
6
476 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
Jacking Locations
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 477
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and jack-handle from
stowage.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Place the jack underneath the lift area that is closest to
the flat tire. Center the jack saddle between the drain
flute formations on the sill flange. Turn the jack screw
clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift
area of the sill flange.
6
Front Jacking Location
478 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts. For vehicles so equipped,
remove the wheel cover from the wheel by hand. Do not
pry the wheel cover off. Then pull the wheel off the hub.
WARNING!
Rear Jacking Location
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
with the jack handle. Raise the vehicle until the tire just covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
clears the road surface and enough clearance is obtained edges.
to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides
6. Install the spare tire.
maximum stability.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 479
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
NOTE:
• For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires — General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for additional warnings, cautions,
and information about the spare tire, its use, and
operation.
7. Install the wheel nuts with the cone-shaped end of the
nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Mounting Spare Tire
6
480 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counter- 11. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area. Do not
clockwise with the jack handle.
stow the deflated tire in the spare tire stowage location.
Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced as soon
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
as possible.
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each 12. To stow the winch cable and retainer, fit the asnut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of sembled jack-handle over the winch drive nut. Rotate the
each lug nut is 95 ft/lbs (130 N·m). If in doubt about the jack-handle assembly clockwise until you hear the winch
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque mechanism click three times. It cannot be over tightened.
wrench by you authorized dealer or service station.
13. Stow the jack-handle and jack.
10. Lower the jack to its fully closed position.
14. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Adjust the
tire pressure as required.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack, thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 481
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two lug nuts on the mounting studs
which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the lug
nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
6
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2 — Valve Notch
3 — Wheel Lug Nut
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Mounting Stud
482 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two lug nuts. Do not use a
hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each
nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of
each lug nut is 95 ft/lbs (130 N·m). If in doubt about the
4. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
nuts.
7. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
WARNING!
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
result in personal injury.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts.
handle counterclockwise.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 483
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
handle counterclockwise.
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of precautions.
each lug nut is 95 ft/lbs (130 N·m). If in doubt about the
correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
6
484 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located between the left
front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash
shield. To allow jump-starting, there are remote battery
posts located on the left side of the engine compartment.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (Covered With Protective Cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 485
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. To remove the cover, press the locking
tab and pull upward on the cover.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
6
486 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 487
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle,
the reverse sequence:
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with the disCAUTION!
charged battery.
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote positive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
6
488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
NOTE:
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Concan often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
trol, turn the system OFF before attempting to
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
“rock” the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Stability
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
Program (ESP)” in “Starting and Operating”
and REVERSE. Using the least accelerator pedal pressure
for further information.
to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 489
WARNING!
2. Open the center console and remove the shift lever
override access cover.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
6
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position 8. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover in the
without starting the engine.
center console.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. With Keyless Enter-N-Go — If Equipped
If the engine is running, press the START/STOP button to
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar small tool into the hole
turn it off. Release the brake pedal and press the START/
at the front of the center console and push the manual
STOP button once or twice to go to the ON/RUN
override release lever.
position. Do not start the engine. Then, follow the instructions shown above to activate the override.
6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel OFF the Ground
NONE
FWD MODELS
IF transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
AWD MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
• 25 mph (40 km/h)
max speed
Wheel Lift Or Dolly
Tow
Flatbed
Rear
Front
ALL
• 15 miles (24 km)
max distance
OK
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
6
492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, see “Shift Lever
Override” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the
PARK position for towing.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
The manufacturer requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed, or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when
towing. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may result
from improper towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position,
not the LOCK/OFF or ACC positions.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these towing methods could result
in damage to the transmission and/or transfer case.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with be towed faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km), it must be towed with the front
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
wheels OFF the ground (using a flatbed truck, towing
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmisdolly, or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels
sion is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all
raised).
four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL.
• The distance to be traveled must not exceed 15 miles
(24 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 25 mph (40 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km) with front wheels on the ground can
cause severe damage to the transmission. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
6
494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Without The Ignition Key
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. Flatbed
towing is the preferred towing method. However, if a
flatbed towing vehicle is not available, wheel lift towing
equipment may be used. Rear towing (with the front
wheels on the ground) is not allowed, as transmission
damage will occur. If rear towing is the only alternative,
the front wheels must be placed on a towing dolly. Proper
towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the
vehicle.
All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
The manufacturer requires towing your vehicle with all
four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these towing methods can cause
severe damage to the transmission and/or transfer
case. Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
䡵 Engine Compartment — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 499
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 499
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
▫ A/C Air Filter – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
▫ Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
7
496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
▫ Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) – AWD Models
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
▫ Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD Models
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
▫ Cleaning The Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
▫ Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
▫ Underhood Fuses
(Power Distribution Center) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
▫ Front Low/High Beam Headlamp, Turn
Signal/Park Lamp, And Side Marker Lamp . . 542
▫ Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
▫ Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp . . . . . . . 544
▫ License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
䡵 Fluid Capacities
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 549
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
7 — Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
8 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick
9 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
11 — Engine Oil Dipstick
498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
5
6
7
8
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, the
word “gASCAP” will display in the odometer. If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap until a “clicking” sound
is heard and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn
off the message. If the problem persists, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
7
500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
may also turn on the MIL.
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
do the following:
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. crank or start the engine.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte- this test over.
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II a normal bulb check.
system is ready for testing.
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II happen:
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacereturn to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, warranty.
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
DEALER SERVICE
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personsystem to update. A recheck with the above test routine
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is available which include detailed service information for
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced attempting any procedure yourself.
7
502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. Either the range markings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a
crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the
range and MAX at the high end of the range. Adding
1.0 qt (1.0 l) of oil when the reading is at the low end of
the range marking will raise the oil level to the high end
of the range marking.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
7
504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
Engine Oil Viscosity – 2.4L Engine
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
Identification Symbol
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
This symbol means that the oil has
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
been certified by the American
the engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine ComPetroleum Institute (API). The
partment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
manufacturer only recommends
information.
API Certified engine oils.
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
should not be used.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505
Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Do not add any supplemental materials, other than leak
detection dyes, to your engine oil. Engine oil is an
engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
Lubricants, which do not have both the engine oil certistation, or governmental agency for advice on how and
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade numwhere used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
ber, should not be used.
your area.
Synthetic Engine Oils
Engine Oil Filter
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recomThe engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recomat every engine oil change.
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
7
506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The
quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high quality oil
filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored in a compartment that is
located behind the left front fender and is accessible
through the wheel well. The wheel and tire assemble do
not need to be removed to access the compartment.
Remote battery terminals are located in the engine compartment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
To access the battery, turn the steering wheel fully to the
right and remove the access panel from the inner fender
shield.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
7
508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter – If Equipped
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
7
510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following steps to replace the
filter:
1. Open the glove box and remove all contents.
2. Push the retaining tab on each side of the glove box
inward while gently pulling the glove box door outward
until both tabs clear the door opening in the instrument
panel.
Glove Box Removal
3. Pivot the glove box downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to install the filter properly will result in the need to
replace it more often.
7. Reinstall the glove box door. Make sure that the hinges
are seated fully as you raise the door. Otherwise, the door
latch will not align properly.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube or equivalent to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
7
512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
grit; after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of contact
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威 with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependlock cylinder.
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necesor soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will sary.
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully
upward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the 2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
liftgate glass.
blade off of the liftgate glass.
7
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Pivot Cap
514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press the
blade holder.
wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer and the rear window washer
share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
flush out the residual water.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
fluid when the message “LoWASH” appears in the or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exinstrument cluster.
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damWARNING!
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrimust be exercised when filling or working around
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
the washer solution.
7
516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
7
518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine coolant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant (antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
(Continued) to five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
7
520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainOrganic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant tain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
the vehicle is operated.
• The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
equivalent.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
2.4L Engine – the coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the engine idling and warm to normal
operating temperature, the level of the coolant in the
bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines,
shown on the bottle.
3.6L Engine – the level of the coolant in the pressurized
coolant bottle should be between the “COLD” and
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is “FULL” range on the bottle when the engine is cold.
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
with your local authorities to determine the disposal no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
7
522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
coolant freeze point or replacing engine coolant (anti- • Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
freeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As long as
• Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in
the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the
the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If
coolant bottle need only be checked once a month. When
engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maincontents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protain the proper level, it should be added to the coolant
tected against freezing.
bottle. Do not overfill.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
Points To Remember
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporand distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder – Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the “Brake Warning Light” indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir.
7
524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
Automatic Transmission
The automatic transmission and differential assembly are
contained within a single housing.
The fluid level in the automatic transmission should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transmission and the fluid.
7
526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Lubricant
CAUTION!
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor- Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
mance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmis- the chemicals can damage your transmission composion fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- Vehicle Limited Warranty.
tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level using the recommended Fluid Level Check – 2.4L Engine
fluid. No chemical flushes should be used in any trans- Use the following procedure to check the automatic
mission; only the approved lubricant may be used.
transmission fluid level properly:
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of
60 seconds.
3. Apply the parking brake fully.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear position
ending with the lever in PARK.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527
5. Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate If the fluid level is low, add sufficient fluid through the
the possibility of dirt entering the transmission.
filler (dipstick) tube to bring it to the proper level. Do not
overfill.
6. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or cold. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82°C), which is
CAUTION!
the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is
driven at least 15 miles (24 km). Hot fluid cannot be held • Using a transmission fluid other than the manucomfortably between the fingertips. Cold fluid is at a
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deteriotemperature below 80°F (27°C).
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
7. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated. Then,
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
remove dipstick and note the reading.
will require more frequent fluid and filter
a. If the fluid is hot, the reading should be in the
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genucrosshatched area marked “HOT” (between the upper
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for furtwo holes in the dipstick).
ther information.
b. If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between
the lower two holes in the area marked “COLD.”
(Continued)
7
528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dirt and water in the transmission can cause
serious damage. To prevent dirt and water from
entering the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is
re-seated properly.
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) – AWD Models Only
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If
Fluid Level Check – 3.6L Engine
leakage is detected, check the fluid level by removing the
The automatic transmission has no dipstick. Your autho- fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between
rized dealer can check your transmission fluid level the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 in (4 mm) below the fill
using a special service dipstick.
hole.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
Frequency Of Fluid Change
maintenance intervals
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission maintenance intervals.
is disassembled for any reason.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD Models Only
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage. If
leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing the
fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between
the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 in (4 mm) below the fill
hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
Frequency Of Fluid Change
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper resistance built into your vehicle.
maintenance intervals.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
7
530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap, and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
a month.
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and cargo area be kept • Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
clear and open.
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause, which destroys the paint and protective coating,
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a
the owner.
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
Special Care
•
•
•
•
7
532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove the
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Interior Care
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface,
ner:
which minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
use protectants or other products, which may cause
with a clean, dry towel.
undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to
restore the low glare surface.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
Cleaning Interior Trim
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condicloth, a damp cloth with MOPAR威 Total Clean or equiva- tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
lent, then MOPAR威 Spot & Stain Remover or equivalent
WARNING!
if absolutely necessary. Do not use harsh cleaners or
Armor All威. Use MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent to
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
clean vinyl upholstery
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
Cleaning Leather Upholstery
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth. different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
and MOPAR威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution folliquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
lowed by rinsing.
7
534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel 1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
Glass Surfaces
rag.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial 2. Dry with a soft cloth.
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
Seat Belt Maintenance
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear winDo not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
dow equipped with an electric defroster. Do not use
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
elements.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
directly on the mirror.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
buckles do not work properly.
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care Cleaning The Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent.
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535
FUSES
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located on the passenger side
under the instrument panel.
Cavity
F100
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
F101
10 Amp
Red
F102
20 Amp
Yellow
F103
20 Amp
Yellow
F105
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Cavity
F106
F107
110V AC Inverter – If
Equipped
Interior Lights
F108
Cigar Lighter in Instrument Panel/Left
Rear Power Outlet
Power Outlet in Console Bin/Power Outlet in Rear of Console
Heated Seats – If
Equipped
F110
F109
F112
F114
F115
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Rear Power Outlet
Rear Camera – If
Equipped
Instrument Panel
Climate Control/
HVAC
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Spare
Rear HVAC Blower/
Motor
Rear Wiper Motor
7
536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F116
F117
F118
F119
F120
F121
F122
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
Description
Rear Defroster (EBL)
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
Heated Mirrors
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Steering Column Control Module
All Wheel Drive – If
Equipped
Wireless Ignition
Node
Driver Door Module
Cavity
F123
F124
F125
F126
F127
F128
F129
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Blue
15 Amp
Blue
Description
Passenger Door Module
Mirrors
Steering Column Control Module
Audio Amplifier
Trailer Tow – If
Equipped
Radio
Video/DVD – If
Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537
Cavity
F130
F131
F132
F133
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
15 Amp
Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Description
Climate Control/
Instrument Panel
Passenger Assistance/
Hands Free System –
If Equipped
Tire Pressure Module
Spare
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)
The power distribution center is located in the engine
compartment.
Cavity
F101
F102
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
60 Amp
Yellow
MiniFuse
Description
Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
7
538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
F103
F105
F106
F139
F140
F141
F142
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
60 Amp
Yellow
60 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
MiniFuse
Description
Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
Ignition Run Relay
Interior Power Distribution Center Rail
Run/Accessory
Relays
Climate Control
System Blower
Power Locks
Anti-Lock Brake
System
Glow Plugs – If
Equipped
Cavity
F143
F144
F145
F146
F147
F148
F149
F150
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
Description
Exterior Lights 1
Exterior Lights 2
To Body Computer –
Lamp
Spare
Spare
Radiator Fan Motor
Starter Solenoid
25 Amp
Natural
Powertrain Control
Modules
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539
Cavity
F151
F152
F153
F156
F157
F158
F159
F160
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
Headlamp Washer
Motor – If Equipped
Diesel Fuel Heater –
If Equipped
Fuel Pump
Brake/Electronic Stability Control Module
Transfer Case Module
– If Equipped
Active Hood Module
– If Equipped
Spare
Interior Lights
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
F161
F162
50 Amp
Red
F163
50 Amp
Red
F164
F165
F166
F167
F168
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Green
10 Amp
Red
Description
Horn
Cabin Heater #1/
Vacuum Pump – If
Equipped
Cabin Heater #2 – If
Equipped
Powertrain Auto
Shutdown
Powertrain Shutdown
Spare
Powertrain Shutdown
Air Conditioner
Clutch
7
540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
F169
40 Amp
Green
F170
F172
F173
F174
F175
F176
MiniFuse
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
30 Amp
Green
10 Amp
Red
Description
Emissions – Partial
Zero Emissions
Vehicle Motor
Emissions – Partial
Zero Emissions
Vehicle Actuators
Spare
Cavity
F177
F178
F179
F181
Anti Lock Brake
Valves
Siren – If Equipped
Spare
Powertrain Control
Modules
Cartridge
Fuse
F182
F184
100 Amp
Blue
50 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Pink
MiniFuse
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp
Red
Description
All Wheel Drive
Module – If Equipped
Sunroof – If Equipped
Battery Sensor
Electrohydraulic
Steering (EHPS) – If
Equipped
Cabin Heater #3 – If
Equipped
Front Wiper Motor
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
LIGHTS BULBS – Exterior
Bulb No.
Low Beam Headlamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
High Beam Headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Park/Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757AK
Side Marker Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSX24W
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . . . . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
LIGHT BULBS – Interior
Bulb Number
Courtesy/Reading Lamps (Incandescent) . . . . . . . . 578
Courtesy/Reading Lamps (Optional LED) . . . . . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Glove Box Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 LIGHTS BULBS – Rear (LED Version)
Bulb No.
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder . . . . . . . . LED Rear Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Rear Tail (Liftgate) Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
Rear
Turn
Signal
Lamp
.
.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WY21W
for replacement instructions.
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W21W
7
542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS BULBS – Rear (Bulb Version)
Rear Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Tail (Liftgate) Lamp . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Bulb No.
. P27/7W
. P27/7W
PY27/7W
. P27/7W
BULB REPLACEMENT
Front Low/High Beam Headlamp, Turn
Signal/Park Lamp, And Side Marker Lamp
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: It may be necessary to remove the air cleaner
filter housing and position the Totally Integrated Power
Module (TIPM) aside to replace certain lamps in the left
headlamp housing.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Front Turn Signal/Park Lamp Bulb
Side Marker Lamp Bulb
Low Beam Headlamp Bulb
High Beam Headlamp Bulb
2. Rotate the applicable bulb and connector assembly 1⁄4 3. Disconnect the bulb from the harness connector and
turn counterclockwise and remove the assembly from the then connect the replacement bulb.
headlamp housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543
CAUTION!
2. Remove the electrical connector from the fog lamp
housing.
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
4. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
headlamp housing and rotate it 1⁄4 turn clockwise to lock
it in place.
Front Fog Lamp
NOTE: Turn the steering wheel to the right if replacing
the left front fog lamp or to the left if replacing the right
front fog lamp to allow for easier access to the front of the 3. Squeeze the two tabs on the side of the bulb socket and
wheel well.
pull straight out from the fog lamp.
1. Remove the fasteners retaining the front lower wheel
well access panel and remove the access panel.
7
544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
4. Install the replacement bulb and connector assembly
straight into the fog lamp until it locks into place.
5. Reinstall the front lower wheel well access panel and
fasteners.
Rear Turn Signal And Backup Lamp
The taillamps are a two-piece design. The tail/stop/rear
turn signal lamps are located in the rear corner body
panels. The tail and backup lamps are located in the
liftgate.
Changing The Rear Turn Signal Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two fasteners from the inboard side of the
taillamp housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool)
between the body panel and the outboard side of the
taillamp housing with one hand and grasp the flange on
the inboard side of the taillamp housing with the other
hand. Use the trim stick and hand pressure together to
disengage the taillamp housing from the vehicle.
Changing The Backup Lamp
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two fasteners retaining the taillamp housing to the liftgate from the inboard face of the liftgate.
4. Rotate the applicable bulb’s electrical connector 1⁄4
turn counterclockwise and remove it from the taillamp
housing.
5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
taillamp housing and rotate the connector 1⁄4 turn clockwise to lock it in place.
7. Reinstall the taillamp housing and fasteners.
7
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Carefully insert a trim stick (plastic flat-blade tool) 5. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
between the taillamp housing and the liftgate. Use the the replacement bulb.
trim stick and hand pressure together to disengage the
6. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the
taillamp housing from the liftgate.
housing and rotate the connector 1⁄4 turn clockwise to
lock it in place.
7. Reinstall the taillamp housing and fasteners.
License Plate Lamp
1. Push the small locking tab sticking out of the end of
the lens toward the side of the vehicle and hold it in that
position.
4. Rotate the applicable bulb’s electrical connector 1⁄4
turn counterclockwise and remove it from the housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
3. Hold the lens with one hand and rotate the bulb’s
electrical connector 1⁄4 turn counterclockwise with the
other hand and then separate the bulb and connector
assembly from the lens.
4. Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install
the replacement bulb.
5. Install the bulb and connector assembly into the lens
and rotate the connector 1⁄4 turn clockwise to lock it in
place.
6. Insert the end of the lens without the locking tab into
the housing on the liftgate and then push the opposite
License Lamp
end of the lens into the housing, making sure it locks in
2. Insert a small flat-blade tool between the end of the
the housing.
lens with the locking tab and the surrounding housing
and then pivot the tool to separate the lens from the
housing.
7
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Models
All-Wheel Drive Models
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified)
Cooling System *
2.4L Engine and Single- or Dual-Zone Climate Control System (MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
2.4L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
3.6L Engine and Single- or Dual-Zone Climate Control System (MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
3.6L Engine and Three-Zone Climate Control System (MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
Metric
20.5 Gallons
21 Gallons
77.6 Liters
79.8 Liters
4.5 Quarts
6 Quarts
4.26 Liters
5.6 Liters
10.7 Quarts
10.1 Liters
11.6 Quarts
11.0 Liters
13.1 Quarts
12.4 Liters
14.5 Quarts
13.7 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 2.4L Engine
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
ZFR5F-11 (Gap 0.044 in [1.12 mm])
RER8ZWYCB4 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane
7
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威 product.
MOPAR威 Gear Lubricant 75W-90 or equivalent.
MOPAR威 Gear Lubricant 75W-90 or equivalent.
MOPAR威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 or equivalent should be used. If DOT 3 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid + 4, MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威 product.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 554
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
552 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
S anytime a malfunction is suspected.
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions the oil change
indicator message will illuminate, this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicles oil
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
if it has been 6 months since your last oil change even
if the oil change indicator message is NOT illumiOn Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
nated.
equipped vehicles “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 553 M
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals At Each Stop For Fuel
exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, which• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
ever comes first.
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
required.
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Instrument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odometer” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
554 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or • Change the engine oil filter.
damage.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
CAUTION!
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
S
C
H • Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
E
operation.
D
U
L
E
S
8
At Each Oil Change
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 555 M
8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 556 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
N
T 18 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 557 M
40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 558 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
N
T 42 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
56,000 miles (91 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
64,000 miles (104 000 km).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace rear drive assembly (RDA) fluid.
❏ Replace power transfer unit (PTU) fluid.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 559 M
72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) whichever
comes first.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 560 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
N
T 66 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
96,000 miles (156 000 km).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (3.6L Engine).
❏ Inspect and replace PCV Valve if necessary.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 561 M
104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at
104,000 miles (169 000 km) or 60 months
whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 562 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or
N
T 90 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid
and filter(s).
❏ Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L Engine).
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Replace rear drive assembly (RDA) fluid.
❏ Replace power transfer unit (PTU) fluid.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 563 M
136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 564 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I 152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
N
T 114 Months Maintenance
E Service Schedule
N ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
A
filter.
N ❏ Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
C
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
E
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 565 M
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 569
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
䡵 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
䡵 If You Need Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center . . . . . 570
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 570
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
9
568 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 569
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
Prepare For The Appointment
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
for an appointment.
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
service history. This can often provide a clue to the with our products and services.
current problem.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
Prepare A List
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
service advisor know.
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your correctly and in a timely manner.
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
9
570 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re- P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
solved with this process.
Phone: (800) 423–6343
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
In Mexico contact:
center.
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenSante Fe C.P. 05109
ter should include the following information:
Mexico, D. F.
• Owner’s name and address
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 571
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Service Contract
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle contract documents, and contact the person listed in
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected those documents.
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
9
572 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 573
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., To order the following manuals, you may use either the
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Masobtain other information about motor vehicle safety from tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are achttp://www.safercar.gov.
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
574 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Service Manuals
• Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
information that students and professional technicians
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vemaintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
capabilities and safety tips.
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
Call toll free at:
and charts.
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 575
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
WARNING!
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
times as well on the government course as a tire graded include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the peak traction characteristics.
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
9
576 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
578 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396,399
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 519
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 506
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,509
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508,509
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355,508
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61,70
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,69,74,92,274
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64,67,70
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . 65,67,70
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
All Wheel Drive (AWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280,400,402
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 17
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519,548
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 17
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30,31
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
INDEX 579
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . 23
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,92
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Booster Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399,523
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523,550
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Back-Up Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399,523
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 89
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 355
Automatic Transaxle
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,525
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526,528
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526,528
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,383
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 242
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
10
580 INDEX
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541,542 Cargo Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Rollaway Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94,541
Tri-Fold Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497,504 Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 Check Engine Light
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274,500
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,442 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258,449 Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Child Booster Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,77,80,83,86
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,83
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
INDEX 581
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . .
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . .
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . .
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518,521
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . 519,548,549
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
343 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,534
343 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
292
251 Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
227 Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 207
571 Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
520 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
518 Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
519 Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92,353
531
512
346
251
370
345
422
293
10
582 INDEX
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526,528
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy . . . . 292
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . 242
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 213
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225,283
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
INDEX 583
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 500
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89,497
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497,498
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518,549
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,91,442
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503,548,549
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291,503
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497,504
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504,548
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504,505
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 71
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,91,442
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91,515
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
10
584 INDEX
Exterior Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94,542
Fabric Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,447
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361,509
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505,549
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94,205,276
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443,444
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526,528
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523,550
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395,550
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 549
Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204,276,543
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,197
INDEX 585
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,447
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439,549
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Fuel Optimizer . . .
Fuel Saver . . . . . . .
Fuel System Caution
Fuel, Flexible . . . . .
Fueling . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . .
...
...
..
...
...
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
292
292
447
443
447
535
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447,499
Gasoline (Fuel)
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375,383
10
586 INDEX
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
General Information . . . . . . . . . 17,25,127,161,390,438
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449,452
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449,451
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. 393
. 469
. 185
.
.
.
.
202
542
533
203
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . 206
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203,212
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 206
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Holder, Coin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . 230
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
INDEX 587
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,76
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471,475
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34,369
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Keyless Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
10
588 INDEX
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) . . . . . 82,83
Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94,541
Light Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94,202,542
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,69,74,92,274
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280,402
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . 205,206
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 406
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204,276,543
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202,542
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . 203,212
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206,542
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202,274
INDEX 589
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . 274
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . 207
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542,544
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541,542
Service Engine Soon
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . 277,430
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94,205,542,544
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . 274
Load Floor, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449,450
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82,83
10
590 INDEX
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101,229
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 274,500
Mode
Manual Transaxle
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528,529
Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . 528,529 Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528,529 Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573 Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501,572
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Marker Lights, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Navigation System (Uconnect™ gps) . . . . . . . . . . 225
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
INDEX 591
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,67,71
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . 64,65,67,70
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 439,549
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,291
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277,291
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503,549
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291,503
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505,549
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504,548
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504,505,548
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499,500
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282,469,470
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,573
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Passenger Seat Back Tilt (Easy Entry System) . . . . 195
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 414
10
592 INDEX
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . 242
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529,550
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 520
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Rear Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Rear Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,197
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
INDEX 593
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Reclining Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,197
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 344
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . 277,291
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Reverse Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42,91
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
10
594 INDEX
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43,46,92
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . 52
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75,76,80,86
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46,48
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Child Booster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177,184
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190,197
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Reclining Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194,197
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185,190,197
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 519,549
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
INDEX 595
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94,205,276,544
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422,423,472
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504,549
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25,368
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag
. . . . . . . . 368
. . . . . . . . 368
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
205
212
395
212
212
344
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . . . . . 344
. . . . . . . 251
. . . . . . . 361
. . . . . . . 488
. . . . . . . 239
. . . . . . . 105
. . . . . . . 228
. . . . . . . 242
. . . . . . . . 61
10
596 INDEX
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407,453 Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94,418,575
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 355
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . 281
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414,415
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . 430
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 414
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408,418
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
INDEX 597
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . .
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
410
429
472
424
461
424
200
458
451
465
491
457
465
457
465
392
403
407
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Transaxle
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372,525
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526,528
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
10
598 INDEX
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 230
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 21
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,276,544
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415,449,450
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 17
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504,505
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Underhood Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 343
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,211,514
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
INDEX 599
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41,241
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208,211
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512
Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Wrecker Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
12JC49-126-AC
3rd Edition
Printed in U.S.A.

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project